Home

Omron CS1W-ETN21 User's Manual

Contents

1. 6 Make the required settings i e the IP address in this example 45 Basic Settings Section 2 9 7 After entering the correct values click the Set Button followed by the Reg ist Button to register them vpuur p Cancel Regist Reload The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal com puter and temporarily register them in the Ethernet Unit The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registered in the Ethernet to the flash memory non volatile memory of the CPU Unit The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory non volatile memory when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted Therefore when making the unit settings using the Web function always click the Set Button before the Regist Button Otherwise the entered set values will not be used The Set Button and Regist Button are provided on the window for each setting item The functions of the other buttons are as follows e Cancel Button Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was previously set with the Set Button again If the Set Button has not been clicked the value that was read from the CPU Units flash memory non volatile memory when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed Reload Button Use this button read and display the values saved in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory
2. Number of words n L pumper of Bre i o ex 0 to 15 retries PADI 09DE Flex tto 390words Communications port number 0 to 7 15 11 87 i 0 Cr 2 Response T 0 Required Destination network number 1 Not required Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 i1 87 l 0 i Gre 1 C 4 fi fi fi Destination unit address L Response monitor time ex ni 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 EE a E1 Hex Inner Board FE Hex Unit connected to network Destination node number N 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the desti nation node A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise To prevent this from occurring when using message services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries so specify a number other than 0 137 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 RECV 098 With the RECV 098 instruction the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the b
3. 0 00 00 00 0005 135 6 6 1 Communications Specifications 0 000000 135 6 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas 0 000 136 6 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 137 6 6 4 Writing Programs 0 eee eee 141 6 6 5 Program Example 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee 145 6 6 6 Transmission Delays 0 0 e eee ee eee 147 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 153 113 Overview of FINS Communications Section 6 1 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications 6 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network Data is sent and received as UDP IP packets or TCP IP packets on an Ether net network PLC Ethernet Unit or host computer Packet FINS command Ethernet Packet FINS response Ethernet Unit PLC In the FINS communications service both an IP address for IP the Internet layer and a FINS node address for FINS the application layer are used for the remote device Also 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP or TCP port number i e the transport layer for identifying the application layer i e the FINS communications service Another number can be set for the FINS UDP port from the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP TCP port numbers refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications FINS Application Layer
4. All1 3BSD Default 9600 Default 9600 C AllO0 2BSD C User defined C User defined IP Address Conversion Baud Rate TOPP keep alive 0 0 0 0 Auto dynamic Auto jo min 0 default 203 C Auto Static C 10BASE T x r Sub net Mask C Mixed aDestinati 0 0 0 O C Table used FTP IP Address Table IP Router Login Password _hs Port No fo D 0 default 21 C51G CJ1G OPU45 Program Using the ETN11 compatible Mode For Ethernet Unit with unit version 1 4 or later operating specifications can be made compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for all methods auto matic generation dynamic I O address table or combined Dynamic changes however are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11 compatible mode While in ETN11 compatible mode the following operations will be performed the same as they are for the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for FINS UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the local FINS UDP port number default 9600 set in the Unit Setup Tab Win dow If the command data is for the Ethernet Unit a FINS response will be sent to the source UDP port number If the command data is for any other Unit such as the CPU Unit a FINS response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS UDP port number The ETN11 compatible mode is set as follows using the Web function setting window 1 2 3 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit
5. 0 cece eee eee eens 1 6 Nomenclature and Functions 0 0 0 cece een nent n ences 1 7 Comparison with Previous Models 0 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Information 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee SECTION 2 Installation and Initial Setup 0 ccc cece eens 2 1 Overview of Startup Procedure 12 0 0 2 cece eee eae 2 2 Switch Setting SS 235 cath ak TE PR A oe espe WE EO Ge ee E Ler Ree 2 3 Mounting ta PLCen ir arire ei seed een eh et is oie OR Pe eed ee ARA A es A 2 47 Network Installation 22 sates Pts Se iow ee yee week Pd Ye eed tae i aes 2 5 Connecting to the Network 0 0 ce eect nee eee eae 2 6 Creating O Tables 27 24 sateen tents Ae ioe a eek welt eee A Yee ted tee i ee 2 7 Unit Setup Procedute s y dscns outs ee ites Rope k week PROS Yee ted ed Eee ie ae 2 8 Using the Web Browser Setting Function 0 0 0 0 eee eee 229 Basic Seti OS 3 seared se foes VSG Saye oe cya Bo phe BoE PS KORN bee Se POTENT Leech as 2 10 Unit Setup for Particular Applications 0 0 0 eee eee 2 11 Communications Test rusa e ie ses Se ieee ee kb ewe Pn 2 12 Converting from Previous Models 00 00 eee cece eee eae SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup ccc cece e ce eees Sol SetIp cs ace a yeaa ve Sh ate atscts E a dea A a E ales Saba asec at 5 3 2 SEINS CP e ath eal a Waihi we Wal ie Wiss Dabs wate kein yates he rete
6. rev SYN snd SYN ACK snd SYN SYN RECEIVED rev ACK of SYN rev SYN ACK snd ACK ESTABLISHED CLOSE rcv FIN snd FIN snd ACK CLOSED WAIT rcv FIN wee rcv ACK of FIN snd ACK FIN WAIT 2 CLOSING LAST ACK rcv ACK of FIN rev ACK of FIN rcv FIN bc ANS Lt snd ACK Timeout 2MSL TIME WAIT gt CLOSED Status Meaning CLOSED Connection closed LISTEN Waiting for connection SYN SENT SYN sent in active status SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent ESTABLISHED Already established CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL 235 Appendix D ASCII Characters Bits 1 to 4 Bits 5 to 7 Binary 0011 0100 Hex 3 4 TIO FrO0 Q 0O 0 iama x gt N lt x Ss lt c alol alo 3 r IN lt xl se lt c tlo slalo nT Mm Ol olol P olon om oa Bl WO Mm o O ZIZI A S TT o TM oO o w SIO 237 Appendix E Maintenance The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can have a negative effect on the entire network
7. 1 The connection is established Local FINS node number B i A y 2 The local device such asa personal Local IP address S computer sends notification that its TY FINS node number is A Ethernet Unit server CPU Unit IP address FINS node number transmission Ethernet IP address FINS node number transmission The FINS node number 3 The Ethernet Unit sends notification is converted for each connection number Setting FINS TCP Connections 1 2 3 1 2 3 that its FINS node number is B 4 The internal node correspondence table is changed 5 It then becomes possible to send and receive FINS messages The procedure for setting FINS TCP connections involves the items described below The settings are made individually for each connection numbers 1 to 16 under FINS TCP settings in the Unit Setup Local Device Is Server 1 2 Set the server Set IP addresses for connected devices If the option for protection by IP addresses is checked set the IP address es for clients where connections are permitted This can be omitted Automatic FINS node address allocation If the client generally a personal computer supports FINS TCP and if it is to be used without setting a FINS node address the value set here from 239 to 254 can be allocated to the client Func
8. CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Unit Number Flags te Bits User Settings CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs A40203 and the corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue Description Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to reset CPU Bus Units number 0 through 15 respectively The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when restarting is completed The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags A30200 to A30215 will turn ON when initialization of the Units begins and turn OFF when it is completed 0 No setting error 1 Setting error Settings OFF to ON Unit restarted Automatically turned OFF by system after restart processing has been completed 91 Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 3 92 SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses This section explains how to manage and use IP addresses Sal IP Addresses sadph avout sx smhn Diels sha est eck ht elt on iA Wek 94 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration 0 0002 e ee ee eee 94 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses 0 0 00 eee eee 94 5 1 3 Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings 0 0004 95 5 1 4 Subnet Masks 0 ee ec eee 95 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 0 000005 96 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications S
9. Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks 7 3 16 TCP SEND REQUEST Requests that data be received at a TCP socket 1 984 bytes max Command Results storage area Number of Data sent code bytes sent Command Block TCP socket number Socket option 178 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Number of Bytes Sent Command Results Storage Area Data Sent Command Response Codes Command Response code code Eara Response Number of code bytes sent The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 The TCP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The number of bytes in the data sent specified between 0 and 1 984 The results storage area stores the actual number of bytes sent Specifies the data to be sent 0000 Normal 0105 Local IP address setting error 0302 CPU Unit error execution not possible 1001 Command too l
10. Response code Description 0000 Normal 000D A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EACCES 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 0042 see note An error occurred EMSGSIZE 0044 Received ICMP data ENOPROTOOPT 0045 Local socket closed ECONNABORTED 0049 Duplicated port numbers EADDRINUSE 004A An error occurred ECONNREFUSED Passive remote is not available 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004C A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EAD DRNOTAVAIL A parameter was specified incorrectly An attempt was made to actively open local TCP port 004E A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table or incorrect router setting 0051 A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOSTUNREACH Incorrect router setting 0053 A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT No remote exists 0081 Socket was closed during opening procedure Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 15 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST Command Block Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Number of Reception Bytes
11. j IP packet output queue 77 50 max x 1 500 bytes TCP socket send request buffers 8 x 4 096 max a Z See note 2 we UDP socket send request buffers 8 x 9 000 max lt a See note 2 Network memory 248K bytes 233 Buffer Configuration Appendix B Network Memory Most of the buffers used for communications servicing by the Ethernet Unit are administered in a buffer config uration called network memory Network memory consists of 248K bytes of memory divided into short and long buffers The use of short and long buffers is determined by the status of the various services when the Ethernet Unit is running The capacity of all buffers cannot be used due to limits in the mounted memory capacity The status of the short and long buffers can be accessed by execution the FINS command MEMORY STATUS READ 2763 Note 1 Thestatus of UDP and TCP socket reception request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764 2 The status of UDP and TCP socket send request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764 234 Appendix C TCP Status Transitions The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 2764 cere ACTIVE OPEN snd SYN Passive OPEN LISTEN
12. r Broadcast FINS UDP Port Default 9600 C User defined fo IP Addtess Conversion Auto Static p Sub net Mask f Mired 0 0 0 0 Table used FTP P Address Table IP Router Table Login Inset Delete Insert Dee Password fe CS1G H CPU43 Program E Checking by Reading Words Allocated in the CIO Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 sete ele 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L System Setting Format Bit address Format classification ETN11 mode ETN21 mode Reserved The CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format can be changed in either of the following two ways Select the method that can be used in the system in which the Unit is to be replaced e By means of the CX Programmer s Unit Setup e By manipulating the rotary switches for the node address with a precision screwdriver Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 E Using the CX Programmer s Unit Setup 1 Select Change Ethernet Unit Mode from the Options Menu in the Unit Set up Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 2 The following confirmation message will be displayed To change the mode click Yes PLC 10 Table 3 After the mode has been changed the following confirmation message will be displayed Click OK to restart the Ethernet Unit After the Unit has been restarted it will begin to operate in ETN21 mode PLC 10 Table Q 57 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 E
13. 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 200 8 2 Error Stasis Sic aena hee kee Ee Shek bh yee BEES GOES ee RA 201 8 3 Error LOD e oxi vel a aA aie cae hewmen ean 202 8 3 1 Error Log Error Codes 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 203 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures 00 cee eee eee 209 8 4 1 Startup Problems 0 0 0 0 eee eee 209 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 0 2 0000228 210 8 4 3 UDP Socket Problems 000 eee eee eee 211 8 4 4 TCP Socket Problems 00 0 0 e eee eee eee 214 8 4 5 FTP Service Problems 0 000 eee eee eee 217 8 4 6 Network Connection Problems 0 00005 219 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes 0 00002 eee eee ee 223 8 6 Results Storage Area Response Codes 0 0 00 e eee eee ee 227 199 Troubleshooting with Indicators Section 8 1 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators The indicators on the Ethernet Unit can be used to troubleshoot some error The probable cause and correction for errors that can be determined from the LINK HOST RUN ERC and ERH indicators are listed in the following table Probably cause Correction Not lit Not lit Not lit sae Power is not being supplied to the CPU Supply power Unit or the power supply voltage is too Make sure that the correct voltage is low being supplied The Ethernet Un
14. The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2003 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Unit Versions of CS CJ series Unit Versions Notation of Unit Versions on Products Confirming Unit Versions with Support Software vi A unit version has been introduced to mana
15. The number of short buffers currently being used The number of short buffers in the system fixed at 1 472 decimal 2 Short Buffer Application by Type Thirteen items are returned 52 bytes a b sa oao m The number of short buffers used for storing communications data The number of short buffers used for protocol headers TCP UDP IP ICMP ARP The number of short buffers used in socket structures The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks The number of short buffers used for routing tables Not used always 0 Not used always 0 The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re assembly queue headers The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses Not used always 0 The number of short buffers used for storing socket options The number of short buffers used for storing access rights The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses 3 Long Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes a b The number of long buffers currently being used The number of long buffers in the system fixed at 64 decimal 4 Not Used Always 0 4 bytes 5 Network Memory Application Two items are returned a b The number of bytes used in K bytes The percentage used 6 Memory Exhaustion Log 12 bytes Counts for the following values indicate a high load on the Ethernet Unit These high loads may be caused by problems in communications partic u
16. CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Yes Simply called auto matic generation method Version 2003 or higher Yes Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Models Supporting IP Address Table Method Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Version 2003 or higher No Set manually so that automatic settings can be used with the automatic generation method Supports IP address table method Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Models that Can Use the Combined Method 106 Product Model Series Version No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP Supports combined method CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 No 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 No CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE T CJIW ETN11 No CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 No Ethernet Unit FinsGateway Version 4 xx or No lower Version 2003 or Yes high
17. Command Response Maximum code code number of stored of of stored records records records Number Number Error log data Error log data The first record to be read The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and 003F 0 to 63 decimal where 0000 is the oldest record The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 1 to 64 decimal in the command The response returns the actual number of records read The maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log Care is required as the error log differs according to the type of PC or CPU Bus Unit In an Ethernet Unit the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 64 decimal The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is returned 165 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Error Log Data Response Precautions Response Codes The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number is returned sequentially The total number of bytes in the error log is calculated as the number of records x 10 bytes record Each error log record thus com prises 10 bytes configured as follows 1st byte 10th byte Errorcode Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month information Error Code Detailed Information Details of the error stored in the record Refer to 8 3 1 Error Log Error Codes for details Minute Second Day Hour Year Month Indicate the time at which the error stored
18. Router FINS message Connecting through multiple segments communications _ Use FINS TCP Router PSs oo pS aSe a eae E Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit Mail communications E PLC 1 PLC FINS message Memory Card communications Connecting within the same segment Use FINS UDP SECTION 6 FINS Communications Monitoring PLC Changes and Sending Equipment Status to the Operator by E mail Operation When the mail send function is used automatic communications applications via the Internet can be constructed relatively easily With this Ethernet Unit the following mail triggers can be set as PLC changes When these settings can be used no special ladder program is required for sending e mail e When a particular bit the Mail Send Switch turns ON e When values change in particular words lt gt lt lt gt gt e When a particular bit changes either OFF to ON or ON to OFF e When a change occurs at the Ethernet Unit stored in error log e When a change occurs at the CPU Unit e g a non fatal error a fatal error or a mode change e At regular intervals The following data can be sent by e mail e Text user created text strings ASCII data Ethernet Unit error log data and status data Attached files IOM data created automatically by the Ethernet Unit data tables and files in File Memory To use the mail send function there m
19. Section 6 6 The methods of computing the maximum time required from execution of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions until processing is completed are described in this section SEND 090 The transmission delay for the SEND 090 instruction can be calculated using the following equation which is illustrated in the following diagram Max delay SEND 090 executed in user program CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node Transmission processing time Transmission Delays Reception processing time CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node CPU Bus Unit service Y processing time local node Transmission processing time Transmission Delays Y Reception processing time CPU Bus Unit g service cycle remote node Maximum transmission delay l CPU Bus Unit service Y processing time remote node CPU data set y processing time remote node CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU execution mode Processing time considerations Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral ser vicing Parallel processing with synchronous memory access Parallel processing with asynchronous memory
20. 08 Insuffi cient mem ory during server pro cessing 09 Insuffi cient mem ory during client pro cessing OA Insuffi cient mem ory during node switch ing There is too much load traffic on the Ethernet Unit Correct the sys tem so that traffic is not concen trated 206 FINS UDP packet discarded 01 to FE Transmission source node address The automatic generation static method was used as the IP address conversion method so remote IP address information in internal memory could not be changed Error Log Section 8 3 Error Meaning Detailed error code Correction EE code PROM Server connection error 1st byte 00 DNS 01 SMTP 02 POP3 03 SNTP 2nd byte 01 Specified host does not exist 02 No ser vice at speci fied host 03 Timeout 04 Closed unilaterally by host 05 Cannot connect because account infor mation does not match 06 Host name resolu tion error 07 Transmis sion error 08 Recep tion error 09 Other error Take either of the following mea sures Correct the settings for each server e Inspect the communications path Ethernet Unit cable connec tions hub router server and correct the situation that is caus ing the error Mail communications error F101 Mail too large F102 Mail received from non specified address F103 Mail subject error F104 Non specified com mand received F106 Mai
21. 6 m 24 m 94 Send receive data address m 25 m 95 Same as FINS variable area designation method 8 m 26 m 96 Timeout value 0000 to FFFF Hex 9 m 27 m m 97 Response code When socket services are requested by control bit manipulation the settings must be made in advance in a Socket Service Parameter Area The parame ters used will vary depending on the service requested For details refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 6 88 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 IP Address Display Setting Area 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 98 1 2 i 3 i 4 m 99 5 6 7 8 IP address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to a value other than 0 0 0 0 this area words m 98 and m 99 will act as an IP Address Display Area and the local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup will be read and stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted If the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup is set to 0 0 0 0 the default setting this value is read by the Ethernet Unit when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted and is used as the local IP address Note Choose the method used to set the local IP address as follows Set the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup when making other settings in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup The settings are made with CX Programmer Set the lo
22. CPU processing Processing time considerations mode settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral ser Ethernet Unit is given Time slice instruction execution vicing priority time Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with CPU Unit cycle time synchronous memory access Parallel processing with 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit access peripheral port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Communicating between OMRON PLCs Note Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Normal Mode Processing time considerations Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Ethernet Unit is given Time slice peripheral servicing priority execution time Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn Set peripheral servicing time chronous memory access Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with 1 ms max asynchronous memory access Priority peripheral servicing For details refer to the CPU Unit oper
23. DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP Broadcast _ FINS UDP Port m FINS TOP Port All1 3BSD Default 9600 Default 9600 C All0 2BSD User defined C User defined p p MIP Address Conversion Baud Rate TCP IP keep alive 10 3 6 1 Auto dynamic Auto 0 min 0 default 120 C Auto Static 10BASE T Sub net Mask C Mixed r Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 Table used IV Change Dynamically FTP IP Address Table IP Router Table Login Password ts t Port No fo Del E 0 default 219 CSIG CJIG GPU45 Program 6 Transfer the settings to the PLC Click on Yes in the following dialog box PLC 10 Table N Are you sure you want to transfer data to the PLC 7 In order for the Ethernet Unit Setup to go into effect the Unit must be re started Click on Yes in the following dialog box PLC 10 Table IN Do you want to reset the CPU SIOU 8 Check the Ethernet Unit s LED indicators After the RUN indicator has turned OFF and then turned ON again the Ethernet will recognize the new settings i e the IP address in this case 2 8 Using the Web Browser Setting Function For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later the Ethernet Units system set tings can be set using the Web browser of a personal computer or other device The Ether
24. Procedure for Using FINS UDP 1 Make the basic settings Refer to SECTION 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks L Make the settings in the Unit Setup With the CX Programmer connected online select the Ethernet Unit in the CX Programmer s I O Table Window Right click and select Unit Setup Then make the following settings in the Unit Setup Window Setup Tab e Broadcast FINS UDP port Default 9600 IP address table for the IP address table method only L Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC L Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Note Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 117 FINS TCP Method Section 6 3 6 3 FINS TCP Method 6 3 1 Overview FINS TCP Features The FINS TCP method is a FINS communications metho
25. 0000 Hex 2 s 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s Destinati estination node number N in units of 0 1 s 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 139 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Commands Addressed to CS CJ series CPU Units The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed by a CS CJ series CPU Unit For details refer to the CS CU series Program mable Controllers Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the Ethernet Unit refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units I O memory area access Command code MR SR MEMORY AREA READ Function Reads the contents of consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA
26. 8 To enable the unit settings that have been registered in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory turn the power to the PLC system OFF and ON again or restart the Ethernet Unit 2 9 Basic Settings 46 The following items comprise the basic settings in the Ethernet Unit 100Base TX setup Each item is described in detail below e IP address e Subnet mask e Broadcast settings e Baud rate TCP IP keep alive IP router table E IP Address For the IP address set the Ethernet Unit s local IP address Depending on the value that is set the IP address has a great influence on the connectability of the Ethernet Unit To make full use of the Ethernet func tions it is necessary to study the applications and network system design when determining IP address allocations Before setting the IP address refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses There are several ways to set IP addresses Basic Settings Section 2 9 Default Settin The Ethernet Unit operates using the default IP address when the Unit is mounted to the PLC and initially registered in the I O tables i e when the Unit settings have not been made and the IP Address Display Setting in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area is still all zeros The default IP address is determined as follows Default IP address 192 168 250 FINS node address The FINS node address is set by the rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit If the defa
27. A is taken as the end net work then network B becomes the relay network and node c becomes the relay node If network C is taken as the end network then network B still becomes the relay network and node e becomes the relay node 124 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 Example 3 All Nodes This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all nodes Unit 5 PLC Node 6 N Network 10 Unit 3 yait en Node 4 CIE pic EJS pic ode Unit 2 kin He Unit 7 Node 3 Node 15 Network 20 Network 30 PLC P pic pic We ik Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 5 Unit 6 Node 1 Node 2 Node 5 Node 10 PLC 1 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No Noj network network node 1 010 05 1 020 010 004 2 2 030 010 005 3 3 PLC 2 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No Noj network network node 1 010 03 1 030 010 005 2 020 02 2 3 3 PLC 3 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network netw
28. A mode compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 was mode added to the added in the operating specifications for FINS UDP messages ETN21 settings for sent from a different UDP port number than the FINS UDP FINS UDP port number set in the Ethernet Unit 28 SECTION 2 Installation and Initial Setup This section explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation 2 1 Overview of Startup Procedure 0 0 0 eee 30 2 2 Switch Setungs lt 04 4 6 nes eve Goleadh ete ie bea Wess ey E baie 31 2 2 1 CS series Ethernet Units 0 00 00 0000 e ee ee eee 31 2 2 2 CJ series Ethernet Units 00 00 0000 eee eee 32 2 3 Mounting toaPLC 2 eens 33 2 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC 0 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee 33 2 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC 2 eee eee 33 2 4 Network Installation seuseueurna enerne eneee 34 2 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions 000000000 34 2 4 2 Recommended Products 00 0000 eee ee eee ee 35 2 4 3 PreCautlONS lt 25 68 3 6 GReTL De Me S A RO Ebates Bie gales 35 2 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units 37 2 5 Connecting to the Network 0 00 0 2c eee 38 2 5 1 Ethernet Connectors 0 00 0 eee eee ee eee 38 2 5 2 Connecting the Cable 0 00 00 eee eee eee 38 2 6 Creating I O Tables 0 cece eee 39 2 6 1 I O Table Overvie
29. access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral servicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual 147 148 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU execution mode Processing time considerations Normal Mode Set time for peripheral servicing Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with synchro nous memory access Parallel processing with asynchro 1 ms max nous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Transmission Processing Time Number of words sent x 0 002 0 550 ms Transmission Delay The transmission delay time will be as given below depending on the baud rate set for the Ethernet Unit There may be additional delays depending on devices such as hubs in the network configuration Delay time 100Base TX Number of words sent x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Number of words sent x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Reception Processing Time Number of words sent x 0 003 0 704 ms CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit
30. so specify a number other than 0 138 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CMND 490 The CMND 490 instruction sends n bytes of command data starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the node at node address N the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Destination node number N 15 0 s ee co E Com Interpretation gt mand S 1 data n 5 bytes i i Response D gt Re sponse D 1 data m am bytes 2 ae 490 S Beginning command storage word D Beginning response storage word C First word of control data below 15 o c L Se Number of bytes of command data n 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 o al a Number of bytes of response data m 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 11 87 0 15 10 87 3 0 C 2 0 0 l C 4 0 0 L Number of retri Destination network number umber Or retries 00 Hex Local network __ Oto F Hex 0 to 15 retries 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 Communications port number 0 to 7 15 87 0 Response C 3 0 Required i 1 Not required Destination Unit address 00 Hex CPU Unit 15 10 87 3 0 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 C45 E1 Hex Inner Board L 1 i FE Hex Unit connected to network L Response monitor time
31. 2 1 0 n 19 to n 22 UDP Open Request Switch TCP Passive Open Request Switch TCP Active Open Request Switch Send Request Switch Receive Request Switch Close Request Switch 84 CIO Area Allocations UDP Open Request Switch Status Manipulated by Unit operation UDP socket opened when switch is turned ON Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been completed i e when a connection has been made TCP Passive Open Request Switch Passive TCP socket opened when switch is turned ON Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been completed i e when a connection has been made TCP Active Open Request Switch Active TCP socket opened when switch is turned ON Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been completed i e when a connection has been made Send Request Switch Send processing executed when switch is turned ON The protocol TCP UDP is determined when the socket is opened Unit turns OFF switch when send processing has been completed Receive Request Switch Receive processing executed when switch is turned ON The protocol TCP UDP is determined when the socket is opened Unit turns OFF switch when receive process ing has been completed Close Request Switch Close processing executed when switch is turned ON The protocol TCP UDP is determined when the socket is opened Unit turns OFF switch when
32. 250 2 Ethernet Unit unit number 0 Controller Link Unit node address 1 Controller Link Unit unit number 1 Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit Node address 2 Ethernet network address 1 PLC2 Routing according to routing table Routing to final network address 2 requires relaying through node address 2 of relay network address 1 Ethernet Unit Controller Link network address 2 CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC3 s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name Network classification Setting PLC3 Ethernet Network Tab FINS destination FINS transmission source address 1 Network number 2 Node address 3 2 000 bytes 2 seconds Frame length Response monitor time Workstation node address 1 Driver Tab Not selected 192 168 250 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 9600 Automatic generation method IP address Port number CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Same as for System Configuration Example 1 Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer them 1 Using CX Integrator connect online and select Routing table Settings Then create FINS local routing tables a local network table and a relay network table Example PLC 1 Routing Table Settings 129 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Local Network Table Unitnumb
33. 323 DNS ioscan BLE ae ae eee Maat ue OE areaeetne BAL OM TP E E N E E nck aa he ce E baohWis sate aw 05 0am REELS aa oN LER RHEE Ran bee Ae ideo aa acs Bad A POP ear secs ennai 5 oa E E seca ta BERG AR 0 ok Lace eth E UaGh WSC aL hata Pace BE aE Le Lost acd iba een aaa ts B 6 Ma Addressa 5 Se ee ta bb E a bE eae Tah ACT Sid oa LG Bo aot acd E ew aaa ts Behe Send Ma 2c 55 Se eea los bob a saa w a gs ob op ase oc bla RAGCD Uae Sock a REESE Sle a a wba een aaa ts Be8 RECEIVE Malis ianei ene a saga 0 ea a abe Saag E A Lace BE od Le LSet acd aE aaa ts B29 AutovAdjUst Time ss so ic ose 5 Je haces sone ae E A bop tease spat sues Ue E eel avec lace Ea Be LOY HELP pean 7 ile esee ates gah N tata seca oes GSS ia 13S oboe cae etal A obo eee On xxi xxii xxii xxii xxiii xxiii XXV o N 13 17 23 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 38 39 41 43 46 50 52 53 61 62 64 66 67 68 69 70 72 74 75 Ix TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations 6622 77 4 1 ClO Area Allocations 0 0000 ccc cence ee eee eee eee ee eens 78 42 DMArea Allocations ered eain na ccc eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eens 86 4 3 Auxiliary Area Data 0 ccc cence nent e eens 90 SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses cccecccccccssees 93 Deli 2 IPE ATESSES E oe connec Toe ect a haa aed tk ed atta E Acsbaa ees ate bes TE tee hare ta ian matinee EE pets 94 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communicatio
34. 35 x 130 x 101 mm W x H x D CJ series Ethernet Unit Model number CJ1W ETN21 Type 100Base TX Can be used as 10Base T Applicable PLCs CJ series PLCs Unit classification Cu series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be 4 max including Expansion Racks mounted Transfer Media access CSMA CD specifica method tions Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX 10 Mbit s 10Base TX Transmission media Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Categories 5 5e Categories 3 4 5 5e Shielded twisted pair STP cable Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Categories 100 Q at 3 4 5 5e Transmission dis 100 m distance between hub and node tance Number of cascade 2 connections Current consumption Unit 370 mA max at 5 V DC Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS 0040 10 to 57Hz 0 075 mm amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes each sweep time 8 minute x 10 sweeps 80 minutes Shock resistance Conforms to JIS 0041 147m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free of corrosive gas Ambient storage temperature 20 to 75 C Weight 10
35. 7 ERROR LOG READ 0 00 165 7 3 8 ERRORLOG CLEAR 0 0 0 0 R eee eee 166 7 3 9 UDP OPEN REQUEST 0 000 167 7 3 10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST 0 00 0002 eee 168 7 3 11 UDP SEND REQUEST aaa oea an eee eee 169 7 3 12 UDP CLOSE REQUEST 0 00 eee 171 7 3 13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST 0 0 000000005 172 7 3 14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST 0 0000 174 7 3 15 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST 0 00 00 00002020 177 7 3 16 TCP SEND REQUEST 00 0 0 178 7 3 17 TCP CLOSE REQUEST 0 0 0 180 923218 PING wesc hts be Shs ee eee NEES ube MOR ie EOE aS 181 7 3 19 FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 182 7 3 20 FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ 183 7 3 21 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE 04 184 7 3 22 IP ADDRESS WRITE 0 0 eee eee eee 185 7 3 23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 00 0 186 7 3 24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 0 000 187 7 3 25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 00 0 0 0 00005 189 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ 0 0000000 ee eee 193 7 3 27 SOCKET STATUS READ 000 000 R GRN 195 7 3 28 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ 196 7 3 29 JP ADDRESS READ reinn top soe eee Ree Rb ew 197 155 Command Codes and Response Codes Section 7 1 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 7 1 1 Command Code List The
36. 8 10 22 51 Auxiliary Area 136 B baud rate CJ series 14 CS series 13 setting 49 Baud Rate field 63 Bit value change field 71 bits addresses 90 158 error status 83 201 service status 82 status of UDP TCP sockets 80 BROADCAST DATA SEND 164 Broadcast field 62 broadcast setting 48 broadcast test command 164 reading results 164 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 164 buffers 193 231 configuration 233 C C200H PRO27 E 40 cables communications xxv Index connections 38 installation 37 precautions 35 twisted pair 11 CJ series 14 CS series 13 cascade connections 36 CJ series 14 CS series 13 ChangeMode command 6 73 CIO Area 136 allocations 78 CJ1W ETN11 comparison 27 compatibility 53 clock automatic adjustment 8 10 22 51 Close Request Switch 85 Closing Flag 80 CMND 490 instruction 8 17 19 139 commands FINS commands 156 remote 6 ChangeMode 6 ErrorLogClear 6 ErrorLogRead 6 FileDelete 6 FileList 6 FileRead 6 FileWrite 6 FinsSend 6 IOMRead 6 IOMWrite 6 MailLogClear 6 MailLogRead 6 PARAMBackup 6 Test 6 UMBackup 6 Communication Unit Tab 131 communications cables xxv Communications Port Enabled Flags 90 141 Communications Port Error Flags 141 connectors recommended models 35 Contact Output Units installation 37 interference with Ethernet 37 249 precautions 37 CONTROLLER DATA READ 160 Controller Link 1
37. Avenue 11 01 UE Square Singapore 239920 Tel 65 6835 301 1 Fax 65 6835 2711 OMRON CHINA CO LTD Room 2211 Bank of China Tower 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road PuDong New Area Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5037 2222 Fax 86 21 5037 2200 omron S Authorized Distributor XM J Cat No W420 E1 04 Note Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan This manual is printed on 100 recycled paper
38. CSV files created by programs such as Excel can be received TXT If this option is selected text files can be received Custom 1 to 3 Receive Command Setting Receive specified com mand only If this option is selected files with extensions specified by the user can be received Contents If this option is selected only specified remote mail commands are executed The commands to be received can be specified in the checkboxes below Default FileWrite If checked files can be written Not checked FileRead If checked files can be read Checked FileDelete If checked files can be deleted Not checked FileList If checked files can be listed Checked UMBackup If checked the user program can be backed up Checked PARAMBackup If checked the parameter area can be backed up Checked IOMWrite If checked writing to the I O memory area is permitted Not checked IOMRead If checked the I O memory area can be read Checked ChangeMode If checked the operating mode can be changed Not checked ErrorLogRead If checked the error log can be read Checked ErrorLogClear If checked the error log can be cleared Checked MailLogRead If checked the mail log can be read Checked MailLogClear If checked the mail log can be cleared Checked Test If checked the mail rece
39. Command Results Storage Area Timeout Value Command Received Data Results Storage Area Requests that data be sent from a TCP socket CARESSE TERE Command Results storage area Number of Timeout code reception bytes value TCP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Mh ws A eee eee Response Number of Received data code reception bytes The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 The TCP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The maximum number of bytes of data to be received is given in the com mand The number of bytes of data received will be stored in the results stor age area Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0 Stores the received data 177 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Code
40. E 0000 Rack 06 0000 Rack 07 5 j j j j j j 5 j j CS1G CJ1G CPU45 Program 4 Move the cursor to the Ethernet Unit and right click Select Unit Setup from the popup menu to display the window for making the Ethernet Unit Setup The default settings are shown below Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 2 x File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP Broadcast _ FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port Default 9600 Default 9600 User defined C User defined p p IP Address Conversion _ r Baud Rate TCP IP keep alive o 0 0 0 Auto dynamic Auto min 0 default 203 C Auto Static 10BASE T m Sub net Mask C Mixed Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 Table used IV Change Dynamically FTP ___________IP Address Table IP Router Table Login Password J _hs Port No fo Del D default 219 CSIG CJIG GPL45 Program At the point where the Ethernet Unit is mounted and the I O tables has just been created the default values are in effect for all of the settings 42 Using the Web Browser Setting Function Section 2 8 5 Make the required settings i e the IP address in this case Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 2 x File Options Help Setup FINS TCP
41. Ethernet Unit Server Example IP address S FINS node number B Passive open Connection request CS Connection established I FINS node numbers exchanged Normal data communications Local node No sent After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP server it is termi nated in the following ways e When the connection is closed by the client e When a FINS command to close the connection FINS TCP CONNEC TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST is sent by the client e When there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP client it can be termi nated in the following ways e If the connection is closed by the server e If there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect FINS TCP Method Note Section 6 3 Even if the connection is closed at the FINS TCP client requests continue to be made to the FINS TCP server every few seconds to open a connection After the Ethernet Unit is powered up or restarted the IP address for the con nection used as the FINS TCP client is the remote IP address set under the FINS TCP Tab in the Unit Setup To dynamically change the remote IP address i e during CPU Unit opera tion execute the CMND 490 instruction in the ladder program and send a FINS command FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST command code 27 30 hexad
42. Expansion CPU Rack Connect the Ethernet Unit in any of the posi tions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combi nation with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 33 Network Installation Section 2 4 CPU Rack 10 Units max pna Gover PICI S P C iii U A End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max PII S a a a S Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted E Expansion Backplane 10 Units max p nacover PII S n E Expansion Backplane J 10 Units max r nig cover PII S I O e PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit IC I O Control Unit Il I O Interface Unit The CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit s maximum current consumption is 370 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 2 4 Network Installation 2 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions e Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System being sure to follow ISO 8802 3 specifications You must obtain a copy of these specifi cations and be sure you understa
43. IP network that spans several layers e Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server i e the server can be protected from access by non specified IP addresses e Broadcasting cannot be used e TCP IP has various retry procedures and this tends to lower its perfor mance in comparison with UDP IP e There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made i e 16 connections maximum and any given node can communicate only with up to 16 other nodes at a time 118 FINS TCP Method FINS TCP Frame Format Section 6 3 e Once a FINS TCP connection connection number remote IP address has been set in the Unit Setup it can be dynamically changed from the ladder program using a FINS command i e FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 ip top FINS TCP header FINS frame FCS TCP Port Number for FINS TCP FINS TCP Connection Numbers TCP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS TCP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame TCP frame FINS TCP header frame and FINS frame A TCP data section FINS TCP header FINS frame that exceeds the segment size default 1 024 bytes with automatic adjustment for optimum values between the nodes is split into TCP packets for transmission The split TCP data is then joined automatically at the remote node s
44. Manipulating the Rotary Switches for the Node Address with a Precision Screwdriver Converting from ETN11 Mode to ETN21 Mode 1 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and set the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address as follows Node address Indicators x16 x69 RUN ERC ERH o o Nott non nom 2 Turn ON the power to the PLC The Unit s indicators will change as follows Node address Indicators Co o Nom m Nott 3 Setthe rotary switches for the node address to 01 There will be no change to the indicators Node address Indicators x6 x169 RUN ERC Noth 4 Setthe rotary switches for the node address to F1 The RUN indicator will begin to flash Node address Indicators Lit 5 Set the rotary switches for the node address to 01 The Unit mode change function will start and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five seconds Node address Indicators Co n _ Fasting Ut Flashing 6 After the mode has been changed the indicators will appear as shown be low depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an er ror occurred If the Mode Change was Completed Normally Node address Indicators Co 1 Fasting tk ik e If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change Node address Indicators po 1 Flashing Lit Notit Note If an error occurs in the mode change remove the Ethernet Unit create the I O t
45. Node Number UDP TCP Transport Layer UDP Port No TCP Port No Internet Layer IP Address Ethernet Physical Layer Ethernet Address The FINS communications service is a communications method based on UDPIIP and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet related products In this manual it is called the FINS UDP method In addition to supporting the FINS UDP method the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 support FINS com munications using TCP IP In this manual this is called the FINS TCP method 6 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods It is recommended that FINS UDP and FINS TCP be used as follows e When remote devices do not support the FINS TCP method Use the FINS UDP method for FINS communications with those devices 114 Overview of FINS Communications Section 6 1 e When FINS nodes are connected on the same Ethernet segment Use the FINS UDP method between those nodes Note FINS UDP offers a slight advantage in performance e When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality e When the quality of connections is unreliable as with wireless LAN Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality 6 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet Item Specifications Number of nodes 254 Message length 2 012 bytes max Nu
46. Node address Indicators Co F Fasting tk ik e If an Error Occurred in the Mode Change Node address Indicators 0 F Flashing Lit Notit 59 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 Note Ifan error occurs in the mode change remove the Ethernet Unit create the I O tables and correct the settings using the procedures described in this section 7 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address to its original setting 8 Turn ON the power to the PLC Node address Indicators po o o it Noei Noti 60 SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup This section describes how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation Ball SetiD vent eth sake ithe 56 0 ie Rha fais Somme OA a E ER 62 322 JPINS ECP s s ecet bie th Reais Chan hos Gin hh Geta Rite nerd ewes 64 3 3 DNS et Anan eee ee ee nade UL AEH NOS OT et Ree ee A BAN ER AS 66 3 4 SMTP cots ation dead wc ke Seda ad ae A a ede een 67 3 93 POP jie itch i teh ee Leet aa beret Bs Oo ender eae ie ie ete 68 326 Mal Address noanean rena enen a teal da be ale balan Sh Gk Gauls aac 69 3 7 Send Maths oane ee a En ieee neve axle Niall naka sia hs 70 3 6 Receive Mathis ceed pee ee Boer Be a eS ye ot BS ee ee 72 3 9 Auto Adjust Time 0 0 E E E E E A A S i eee 74 SEA KUE n H A A sos Sikes eho fe ahs Leth Oe ie Rie eee Shee Se 75 61 Setup S
47. OFF again If the socket did not close properly the flag remains ON Check to be sure that this flag is ON before executing a send or receive request 81 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Service Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 n 17 ad aes saka a a Status Accessing Memory Sending Mail Lan Setup Format Link Status Accessing Memory Receiving Mail FTP Status Flag Status Manipulated by Unit operation FTP server operating FTP client connected Reference Operation Manual Con struction of Applica FTP server on standby FTP client ns SECTION 4 not connect Accessing Memory Sending Mail Operation Manual Con struction of Applica tions SECTION 2 ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to create a file to be attached using the mail send func tion OFF when the file to be attached has been created Accessing Memory Receiving Mail Operation Manual Con struction of Applica tions SECTION 3 ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail receive function OFF when the attached file has been stored Not used System Setup For mat Shows the current format in the CPU SECTION 2 Installation Bus Unit System Setup Area by the and Initial Setup ON OFF status of a combination of bits 12 to 13 Not used 14 Link Sta
48. ON dedicated control bits in memory When the Ethernet Unit has completed the requested process the same bit is turned OFF to provide notification Data that is sent or received is automati cally handled according to the I O memory locations specified in the parame ter area There is no need to execute the CMND 490 instruction or to monitor the com pletion timing and actual processing of the instruction so this helps to simplify ladder programming Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 Executing CMND 490 Improved TCP Socket Interface A total of eight ports UDP and TCP combined can be used for socket ser vices UNIX computer etc node with socket services interface Ethernet TCP UDP protocol CS CJ series CPU Unit Ethernet Unit TCP UDP Parameters protocol Ethernet Unit CS CuJ series CPU Unit Another way to use socket services is to request a UDP or TCP socket ser vice by sending a FINS command to the Ethernet Unit by executing CMND 490 from the CPU Unit When the Ethernet Unit receives the socket service request it returns a response to the CPU Unit to confirm that it received the request and then begins the requested processing When the processing is completed the results are stored in the Results Storage Area in the CPU Unit Eight TCP ports and eight UDP ports can be used The TCP socket interface
49. Oo oO j 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST UBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T Section 1 6 Example IP ADDRESS 133 113 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 Attach the label to the front of the Ethernet Unit between the node number switches and the Ethernet connector 0 42 Each communications device connected to the Ethernet network is allocated a unique Ethernet address For the Ethernet Unit this Ethernet address is shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12 digit hexadecimal number omron CJ1W ETN21 ETHERNET UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation I Ethernet Address MADE IN JAPAN Ethernet address 12 digits Note The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command CON TROLLER DATA READ For details refer to 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ on page 160 Indicators The status of the indicators show the operating status of the Ethernet Unit as shown below CS1W ETN21 100Base TX EM CS CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LNK 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST 25 Nomenclature and Functions Indicator Status Not lit Section 1 6 Meaning Operation stopped Hardware error Lit Normal operation 100M Transfer speed Not lit 10 Mbps 10Base T Lit 100 Mbps 100Base TX ERC Ethernet Unit error Not lit Unit normal Lit N
50. Send Mail Status 1 Operation Manual Construction of Applications Section 2 m 1 TCP Socket No 1 Number of Bytes Received Socket Services em ee Operation Manual Construction 1 of Applications Section 6 m 8 TCP Socket No 8 Number of Bytes Received m 9 TCP Socket No 1 Connection Status i Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit m 16 TCP Socket No 8 Connection Status Send Mail function m 17 Send Mail Status 2 Operation Manual Construction of Applications Section 2 m 18 Socket Services Parameter Area 1 Socket Services fp Se Be ee ee ee nee a Oe Aa Operation Manual Construction m 28 Socket Services Parameter Area 2 of Applications Section 6 m 88 Socket Services Parameter Area 8 m 98 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit or IP Address Display Setting Area CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit m 99 86 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 The meanings of the items shown in the above diagram are explained on the following pages For details regarding the related communications services shown in the diagram refer to the indicated sections Send Mail Status 1 2 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Send Mail Status 1 14 13 12 11 10 TITTI IIT III ERS of Send Condition Setting 1 Status of Send Condition Setting 2 Status of Send Condition Setting 3 Status of Send Condition Setting 4 Send Mail Status 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 i A of Send Condition Setting 5 Status of Send Condition Setting 6 Status
51. Setup window Send Mai Tab Send user data Area Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab User defined mail address Send Error Log information Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Send Error Log informat Send Status information Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Send status information Send file data IO memory data Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Send file data IO memory data File data Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab File data IO data IOM Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab I O data IOM IO data TXT Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab I O data TXT IO data CSV Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab I O data CSV File name Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Attached file name Area Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab I O memory data Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G Menu item Parameter item Corresponding CX Programmer function Receive Mail Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Mail Address Protection Setting Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Protect using mail address Attached File Enable Settings Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Receive file with specified extension only Command Enable Setting Unit Setup window Receive Mail Tab Receive specified commands only Status Monitor Menu item Corresponding CX Programmer function Status View Unit information FINS 0501 CONTROLLER DATA READ Unit st
52. Unit in order Execute the ping command for all nodes connected to the network Only SD indicator Power may not be being supplied to the hub is flashing Did all nodes fail to respond to ping command e The twisted pair cable for that node may be Y disconnected e The remote node may not support ICMP Did a particular node fail to respond to ping command e Connect by FTP Is the remote node functioning as an FTP client e If the following parameters are counted the corresponding communications services may not be possible with the remote node IP status 2 ICMP status 5 3 r 1 2 Execute FINS PROTOCOL STATUS READ 3 5 6 All communications services 6 7 8 ping eception status 4 5 6 FTP TCP sockets 3 FINS communications UDP socket TCP status UDP status e If the following parameters are counted the load at the Ethernet Unit may be too high Adjust the user applications IP status 4 8 9 E N D 219 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Mail Not being Sent 220 lit 7 0 6 E N Is required information missing from the mail START Is the HOST indicator Is the HOST indicator flashing Is the user mail transmission status Is the user mail transmission status Is the user mail transmission status Doe
53. Unit Setup Set the number using the NODE NO rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit IP Addresses in FINS Communications Pairing IP Addresses with FINS Node Addresses at Local Nodes Sending Ethernet Unit FINS Messages Section 5 2 A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node including Ethernet Units The IP address must be paired with the FINS node address 1 to 254 by one of the following methods Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Static Set the relation between the IP address and the FINS node address for the Ethernet Unit according to the following equation If the setting does not con form to this equation a setting error will be generated and the ERH indicator will flash FINS node address IP address host number IP Address Table Method and Combined Method With these methods the IP address and the FINS node address for the Ether net Unit have no particular relationship Set both the FINS node address and the IP address so that they are not duplicated in the network When the Ethernet Unit sends a FINS message it must determine the remote node s IP address UDP port number and TCP port number The relation ships between all addresses such as remote FINS node addresses and IP addresses are managed by an internal table at the Ethernet Unit Remote FINS node address Remote IP address Connection Example 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 Remote port number
54. address IP address Set the remote IP address e TCP Nodes Tab ETN_UNIT Properties Userdenmedi es oee eo Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box 133 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Node number Eo User defined a Iippe name A IP address fo fo fo jo TCP setting TCP port number jo keep alive j Cancel C e Node address Set the remote FINS node address IP address Set the remote IP address e Destination port number Set the FINS TCP port number for the remote node Normally the PLC s default setting of 9600 should be specified e Keep alive setting Sets the keep alive function Normally this should be selected 3 Starting FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Service Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway Setup Window and then click the Start Button m System Configuration Example 3 Connecting the CX Programmer Online Using the FINS TCP Method In this example an online connection is made by FINS TCP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS TCP method CX Programmer CX Integrator address 192 1682604 POU address 168 250 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Ethernet Unit node number 2 Fi Way Version 2 insGateWay version 2003 Ethernet Un
55. affected by resetting the CPU Bus Unit 2 Totransfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch connect the CX Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with mul tiple Communications Units mounted 3 Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within the same network as the PLC to which the CX Integrator is connected 123 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 6 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples Example 1 Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multi ple CPU Bus Units are mounted Ethernet network Controller Link network Network A Network B Unit a Unit b PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit ETN Ethernet Unit CLK Controller Link Unit Local Network Table No Local CPU Bus network Unit 1 A a 2 B b m Example 2 Three Interconnected Networks This example shows the relay network table settings for three different inter connected networks Relay Network Table E Rel No howo network Node PLC 1 1 B A b Node a Node o 1 Node c PLC 3 1 A B c Network B Node d C e PLC 4 NGS HE F A B F BE Node f Network C i A C i VEE EA 2 B C f In the table for PLC 3 for example if network
56. be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes e Interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures in external cir cuits i e not in the Programmable Controller must be provided by the customer e Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short cir cuiting may result in burning e Do not install the Unit near devices that generate strong high frequency noise Do not drop the Unit or subject it to excessive vibration or shock e Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws terminal block screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction e Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit e Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure pr
57. cable This is a relay device for connecting multiple nodes in a star LAN Recommended Hubs For details on recommended devices for constructing a network refer to 2 4 Network Installation 1 3 3 Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices Making Settings in the For the Ethernet Unit to function as a node on an Ethernet network make the CPU Bus Unit System settings as required in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area allocated in Setup Area with the CX non volatile memory in the CPU Unit Programmer Use the CX Programmer to make the settings by connecting online from the I O Table Window selecting the Ethernet Unit and then selecting Unit Setup Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted it reads and uses the contents of the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area as the settings for the com munications services 11 System Configuration Making Settings in the Routing Table Area with CX Integrator Middleware for FINS Communications Applications ona Personal Computer FinsGateway 12 Section 1 3 Personal computer running Windows CX Programmer Unit Setup Ethernet Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit OMRON Communications Units use OMRON s original FINS network system Make the settings for the FINS network and the relay path as required in the Routing Table Area allocated to the non volatile memory in the CPU Unit Use CX Integrator to make the settings CX Int
58. close processing has been completed Section 4 1 Reference Operation Man ual Construc tion of Applications SECTION 6 Not used Not used FINS TCP Connection Status n 23 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 85 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 These bits show the status of FINS TCP connections Switch Status Manipulated Unit operation Reference FINS TCP Connec i Turned ON by the Unit when a connectionis SECTION 6 tion No 1 established FINS Commu Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection ications Ser is terminated VGS FINS TCP Connec Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is tion No 2 established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated to to FINS TCP Connec Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is tion No 15 established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is tion No 16 established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated 4 2 DM Area Allocations The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number Offset _ ae 08 07 00 Data direction Related communications services Send Mail function m
59. command codes listed in the following table can be sent to an Ethernet Unit Command code MRC SRC RESET CONTROLLER DATA READ CONTROLLER STATUS READ INTERNODE ECHO TEST BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ BROADCAST DATA SEND ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR UDP OPEN REQUEST UDP RECEIVE REQUEST UDP SEND REQUEST UDP CLOSE REQUEST PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST TCP RECEIVE REQUEST TCP SEND REQUEST TCP CLOSE REQUEST PING FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE IP ADDRESS WRITE CJ Series only IP ADDRESS TABLE READ IP ROUTER TABLE READ PROTOCOL STATUS READ MEMORY STATUS READ SOCKET STATUS READ ADDRESS INFORMATION READ IP ADDRESS READ 7 1 2 Response Code List Response codes are 2 byte codes which indicate the results of command execution They are returned in the response following the command code The first byte of a response code is the MRES main response code which categorizes the results of command execution The second byte is the SRES sub response code which specifies the results MRC Main request code Command Response SRC Sub request code code code MRES Main response code Ji iI SRES Sub response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 156 Socket Applications Section 7 2 The MRES codes are shown in t
60. cover of the manual Cat No W420 E1 04 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content July 2003 Original production March 2004 Information was added for new functions available with new versions of the CX Programmer and Ethernet Unit including the Web function described in new sub section 2 8 and Appendix G The following revisions were also made Page xiv Added information on unit versions Page 3 Added information for CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher Page 7 Corrected or to and in paragraph on automatic clock adjustment Pages 8 and 9 Added information on Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later Page 12 Added information on CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher Page 17 Changed note Page 25 Corrected information for ERH indicator Page 26 Added information on upgrade to unit version Page 28 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 in Note 1 Page 31 Corrected 1 2 to 0 9 and 0 8 to 0 4 in Note Page 40 Changed screen Page 41 Changed screen corrected Right click to Click in steps 6 and 7 and added new sub section on the Web function Page 43 Changed screen Page 45 Added settings to tables Page 47 Added table of settings for HTTP Tab and swapped response and request in dia gram Pages 50 and 58 Changed scr
61. diagram Bit 31 23 0 Class A 0 Network number 7 bits Host number 24 bits Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network number 14 bits Host number 16 bits Bit 31 7 0 ClassC 1 1 0 Network number 21 bits Host number 8 bits Bit 31 0 ClassD 1 1 1 0 Multicast address Cannot be used Bit 31 0 ClassE 1 1 1 1 Identification address Cannot be used The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on the network differ according to the class Number of networks Number of hosts 2 4_9 max 16 777 214 max 216_2 max 65 534 max 28_2 max 254 max The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each and expressed as a punctuated number IP addresses are represented by the decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32 bit address each sepa rated by a period For example the binary address 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130 58 17 32 Note The same network number must be set for every node on the same Ethernet network 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses IP Internet Protocol is a standard communications protocol used throughout the world and is designed to enable communications between any Ethernet nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist To achieve this net work numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services to ensure
62. e mail and then sends the e mail to the Ethernet Unit The Ethernet Unit receives e mail at regular intervals executes the commands and sends back responses by e mail E mail can be received over the Internet and not just from within the intranet POPS server Ethernet E mail Ethernet Unit CS Cu series CPU Unit o ji The following types of commands can be sent to the PLC I O memory read and write backup operating mode changes and file transfers of 1 Mbyte or less Note 1 A POPS server is required to use the mail receive function 2 Mail server settings require specialized knowledge so they should al ways be handled by the network administrator 3 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing this function 4 Mail may not always be delivered Depending on factors such as the con dition of the network mail that has been sent may not arrive at its desti nation 21 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 6 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function The Ethernet Unit can acquire clock information from the SNTP server at a particular time or when a dedicated bit turns ON and it can refresh the inter nal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted SNTP server Ethernet E Ethernet Unit CS CJ series EMA CPU Unit Note 1 An SNTP server is required to use this function 2 SNTP server settings require specialized knowledg
63. entire system enable the various records generated by pro duction equipment to be managed according to clock information and analyzed Note The automatic clock adjustment requires a separate SNTP server Specification of Servers by Host Name In addition to directly specifying the IP address for a SMTP POPS or SNTP server it is also possible by means of the Ethernet Unit s DNS client function to specify the server by host name This enables automatic searches for IP addresses for purposes such as system checking even when the IP addresses for servers have been changed Note 1 A separate DNS server is required to specify servers by host name using DNS 2 The IP address is specified directly for the DNS server Use Web Function to Read Ethernet Unit Settings and Status A Web function is provided in Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later This enables use of a Web browser to read the Ethernet Unit s system settings and statuses Network Connection with Controller Link The Ethernet information network can be connected to the Controller Link control system network by using the FINS communications service function This enables a PLC on a Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC on an Ethernet network and it allows data to be exchanged between them Full Range of Functions for Handling Troubles A full range of functions is provided for promptly handling any troubles that may arise e Self diagnostic functio
64. from a Web browser and select Settings 1 IP address and Protocols System The System Format will be displayed 2 Select ETN11 compatible mode from the FINS UDP option in the System Format click the Set Button click the Regist Button and then turn the pow er supply OFF and ON or restart the Unit using a software restart Note 1 If the ETN11 compatible mode is used internal method tables will not be changed when the power supply is turned OFF and ON or software resets are executed This provides protection from access via FINS UDP from computers that dynamically change their IP address 2 The ETN11 compatible mode is not used for normal applications and should not be used in most cases 101 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 FINS TCP Communications Method Pairing in the FINS TCP Method Note Internal Processing 1 2 3 1 2 3 102 With the FINS TCP method communications are first established for each connection and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted See note Then FINS message communications are executed In this way remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired for each connection Therefore with the FINS TCP method there is no need to set IP address conversions i e pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses as with FINS UDP All that is required is to use the CX Programmer s Unit setup to set the remote IP address for each connection T
65. in the network configuration Baud rate Delay time 100Base TX Command 0 0118 ms Response Number of words sent x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Command 0 0157 ms Response Number of words sent x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Reception processing time command Command 0 704ms Response Number of words sent x 0 003 0 704 ms CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Processing time considerations Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice instruction execution time given priority Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser vicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual 151 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 152 Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Processing time co
66. intranet A device such as a personal computer with a FINS application including a CX Programmer cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an Ethernet Unit that has a private address FINS communi cations over the Internet are also not possible between Ethernet Units with private addresses Either FINS TCP or FINS UDP can be used for the FINS communications service With FINS UDP all of the Ethernet Unit IP address conversion methods can be used 109 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 110 Note e With FINS UDP when the IP address private address of a computer serving as a DHCP client is changed the Ethernet Unit s IP address con version method will be the automatic generation method dynamic the combined method or the IP address table method When FINS TCP is used IP addresses can be changed automatically 2 Transferring Files Files can be transferred using FTP protocol between the PLC and a device such as a personal computer i e an FTP client with a private address on the intranet The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 3 Sending Mail The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit s IP address to the SMTP server by mail via the intranet 4 Receiving Mail The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the POPS server by mail via the intranet 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment The PLC can acquire clock dat
67. it possible to communicate with a wide range of devices workstations com puters and Ethernet Units from other manufacturers Up to eight ports can be used for various protocols enabling the use of vari ous applications Simplified Socket Services Without using the CMND 490 instruction the socket services function for TCP or UDP can be simplified by presetting parameters and using dedicated bits In addition the size of received data accumulated in the reception buffer is now stored and a Data Received Flag has been added These new fea tures eliminate the need for ladder programs to monitor the timing for comple tion of instructions and socket service processing and thus reduce the amount of labor required for program development Features Section 1 2 Improved FINS Message Communications The following functions have been improved over previous Ethernet Unit mod els They allow the scale of the system to be increased and can give greater flexibility to the system configuration including the host computer Expanded number of nodes to 254 max from 126 max e Communications are now enabled even if the host computer s IP address is dynamic DHCP client computers can be handled including TCP IP and UDP IP Previously IP addresses for host computers could be fixed only For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later the Unit can be protected against access from nodes with dynamically changed IP address
68. media with unreliable connections such as wireless LAN Use FINS TCP SECTION 6 FINS Communications Exchanging Data between OMRON PLCs using Ethernet Connecting within the Same Segment Connecting through Multiple Segments Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS UDP and construct applications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 The protocol processing for FINS UDP is simpler than for FINS TCP giving FINS UDP certain advantages in terms of performance Another feature of FINS UDP is that it can be used for broad casting On the other hand with FINS UDP it is necessary to provide measures such as retries for handling communications errors Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP and construct applications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS TCP is the initial func tion supported by this Ethernet Unit CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It pro vides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Reference Intranet eee See Seto E a eee et a here i Production line A Ethernet Unit Ethernet
69. next page When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and RECV 098 is not being executed the send execution program will start when execution condition CIO 000000 turns ON Input CIO 120000 remains ON from the start of SEND 090 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word Contents Meaning D0000 00 OA Number of send words 10 D0001 00 02 Destination network number 2 D0002 04 00 Destination node number 4 Destination unit address 0 Communications port No used 7 D0003 07 05 Response required Number of retries 5 D0004 00 64 Response monitor time 10 s Send Data Creation Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is stored from D00010 onwards Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2 node number 4 unit address 0 the PLC Reset Input Creation Send Error Display 145 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Continued from previous page Execution condition See note 000001 A20207 120000 m 120003 120002 MOV 21 0010 D00005 MOV 21 0003 D00006 MOV 21 2000 D00007 MOV 21 0705 D00008 MOV 21 0000 D00009 RECV 98 D00005 DIFU 13 120003 120002 A21907 120002 120003 A21907 I 120002 A20207 See note m Note 1 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for po
70. occurs e When a fatal error occurs e When the operating mode is changed Not checked Interval time Peri odic timer If this option is selected mail is sent at fixed time intervals The time interval in minutes can be set in the interval time box Not checked Mail address Select the destination mail address The mail destination is the one set under the Mail Address tab Address 1 Send user data If this option is selected user created data is sent in the body of the mail The location for storing the user created data is set by the user defined mail address setting below Not checked Send Error Log information If this option is selected the error log is included in the body of the mail Not checked Send status infor mation If this option is selected status information is included in the body of the mail Not checked Send file data I O memory data If this option is selected any of the following types of data can be sent as file attachments to e mail 1 O memory data IOM 1 O memory data TXT e O memory data CSV e File data any file Select the type of data to be attached from the checkboxes below If I O memory data is selected then also select in I O memory data below the address and range of data to be sent Not checked Attached file name If the above setting is checked so that files can be sent as attachments t
71. of Communications Functions 1 5 1 FINS Communications Service Basic Functions FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on the same Ethernet network by executing SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions in the ladder diagram program This enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations Ethernet UDP or TCP UDP or TCP FN J ee eee CS Cu series CPU Unit Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit User program SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruction 17 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 Note Upgraded Functions Executing from the host computer FINS commands with UDP IP or TCP IP headers enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations For example it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communi cations applications such as the CX Programmer and to perform remote pro gramming and monitoring See note Use CX Programmer version 4 0 to use TCP IP For lower versions of CX Pro grammer FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP IP Ethernet IP Jupp or TCP FINS CS CuJ series CPU Unit OO o Ethernet Unit The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on no
72. omron CS1W ETN21 ETHERNET UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Ethernet Address Ethernet address 12 digits 23 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 Note The Ethernet address can also be checked using the FINS command CON TROLLER DATA READ For details refer to 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ on page 160 CJ series Ethernet Units CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Front Slider Va For mounting to other Units Indicators Display the operating status of the Unit ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LNK oO eo oo ee mj oO oO Oo 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST ahaa Unit Number Switch SES UNIT Used to set the Ethernet Unit s unit Bes No number in one digit hexadecimal 5 NODE Ss No Gam Node Number Switches Sr Used to set the Ethernet Unit s FINS ORY xie node number in two digits hexadecimal 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ey Ethernet Connector Used to connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable 7 Mounting Pin for DIN Track Used when mounting the Unit to DIN Track Slider For mounting to other Units Note An IP address label is provided with the Unit Writing the IP address and the subnet mask on this label and then attaching it to the front of the Unit allows the IP address and subnet mask to be easily confirmed 24 Nomenclature and Functions 1 6 2 m ETN21 RUN ERC SD RD LNK ET o o j
73. set as the destination IP address Once the connection has been established FINS TCP is used for FINS communications Default Server IP Address When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server If the option is selected to use IP addresses to pro tect set the IP addresses as required at clients from which connection is permitted If not set for those connections the default setting of 0 0 0 0 can be used When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit i e the server that is to be connected by FINS TCP It is required that an IP address be set for the remote Ethernet Unit Auto allocated FINS node If the client normally a personal computer applica tion supports FINS TCP and if FINS node addresses are not fixed the client will take 0 as its node address Then when a FINS command arrives the number set here from 239 to 254 will automatically be allocated as the client s FINS node address For details on automatic allocation of FINS node addresses refer to the Operation Manual Construc tion of Applications From 239 to 254 for con nection Nos 1to 16 keep alive For each connection number set whether or not the remote node connection check function is to be used for the FINS TCP server and client If the keep alive box is checked here then when the remote node goes without responding for longer than the monitor time set in the Setup the conne
74. specified connection number a request for a change was received and the processing was stopped Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number 23 Environ ment error no such Unit 226 05 Parameter error Unit settings IP address conversion failed Check the IP address and subnet mask in the System Setup and be sure that settings are correct 07 Configuration error IP address con version in Unit settings IP address conversion is set for automatic conversion only Check the mode settings in the System Setup This error will be generated for the READ IP ADDRESS TABLE command only Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 6 Network Relay Errors For network relay errors using SEND 090 or RECV 098 check the path of the command using the routing tables and the nature of the error using the response code to eliminate the cause of the error For network relay errors using CMND 490 the location of the relay error is recorded in the second through third words of the response as shown below First byte Second byte Bt 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 First word Command code 7 6 5 43 21076543 210 Second word 1 Main response code MRES S b response code SRES Rel fl a 1 PLC non fatal error flag Clay error lag 1 PLC fatal error flag 7 6 5 43 210765 4 3 2 1 0 Third w
75. table Command Number of code records a i C ee idl pata rs Command Response Maximum Number Number IPaddress ww www een e e IP address code code number ofstored ofrecords table records table records of stored records records The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned The response returns the actual number of records read Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response IP Address Table Records Response Precautions Response Codes The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0020 32 records The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configu ration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following dia gram 1 6 bytes Soh FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command in hexadecimal IP Address IP number use
76. that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regard less of where they exist The local system administrator is left the responsibil ity of allocating unique host numbers locally You therefore should obtain a network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure unique ness and allow for future network expansions if required 94 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 3 Ethernet Unit IP Address Settings An IP address must be set even for the Ethernet Unit before Ethernet commu nications can proceed Either use the default for the Ethernet Unit s IP address or else use a Peripheral Device to set it in the DM Area words allo cated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit or in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup For details refer to 2 7 Unit Setup Procedure 5 1 4 Subnet Masks Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too many nodes are connected on a single network In such a case it can be help ful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several subnetworks This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet number Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single Net work ID To establish subnetworks the Host ID in the IP address is divided into a Sub net ID and a Host ID by using a setting called the Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask indicates which part of the Host ID is to be used as the Sub
77. the CPU Bus Unit System Setup even if an IP address is set in the allocated words in the DM Area it will be overwritten with the setting in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup 2 It is not possible to set the following IP addresses If any of these values are set the ERH indicator will flash IP addresses where all network number bits are 0 or 1 IP addresses where all host number bits are 0 or 1 IP addresses where all subnet number bits are 1 IP addresses that start with 127 7F hexadecimal e g 127 35 21 16 89 Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 3 4 3 Auxiliary Area Data The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the Auxiliary Area of PLC memory that are related to the Ethernet Unit Read only Bits Words Word s A20200 to A20207 Communications Port Enabled Flags Function Bits A20200 to A20207 turn ON when a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR can be executed with the corresponding port number Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 Settings 0 Network communi cations running 1 No network com munications running Communications Port Completion Codes These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding port numbers when network instructions SEND RECV CMND or PMCR have been executed Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0000 No error Not 0000 Error code A21900 to A21907 Commun
78. the control port Number 21 is used 1 The setting to enable or disable dynamic changing of remote IP address es is available for Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later 2 Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX Programmer to be included in version 5 0 and higher or using the Web function refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 63 FINS TCP Section 3 2 3 2 FINS TCP Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 24 x File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Ads gt FINS TCP Connection Setup __ __FINS TCP Mode IPAddress Auto allocat keep alive 1 FINS TCP Server srt Valid 2 FINS TCP Server Poo 240 Valid __ Eat 3 FINS TCP Server nee 241 Valid 4 FINS TCP Server ne 242 Valid 5 FINS TCP Server nee 243 Valid 6 FINS TCP Server ne 244 Valid 7 FINS TCP Server sent 245 Valid 8 FINS TCP Server nee 246 Valid 9 FINS TCP Server nee 247 Valid 10 FINS TCP Server nee 248 Valid 11 FINS TCP Server ne 249 Valid i2 FINS TCP Server ste 250 Valid 13 FINS TCP Server nee 251 Valid 14 FINS TCP Server nee 252 Valid 15 FINS TCP Server nee 253 Valid 16 FINS TCP Server ne 254 Valid I Use IP address to protect valid for FINS TCP Server CS1G C 1G CPU45 Program Edit FINS TCP Connection x FINS TCP No 1 FINS TCP Mode Server C Client IP Address 0 0 0 0 IM Auto allocated FINS node 239 I keep al
79. the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to Ethernet Units FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions programmed into the user ladder diagram program Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section refer to the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W340 for further details on programming these instructions 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications 00 0000 00 eee 114 6 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network 114 6 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods 114 6 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet 115 6 2 FINS UDP Method aea a 8 ists BN a tA ORES KARAS AS SA Re 116 6 2 1 OVERVIEWS acest he ated i ae eA Bah eee iad oc 116 6 3 FINS TCR Method sei scss nt e REAR e GA SESS SEAR Oe ees Aaa 118 62351 OVEIVIEW pe i sie eck a Se ke eee Ak se sete wastes 118 6 4 Creating Routing Tables 0 0 00 eee ee eee 122 6 4 1 Routing Table Overview 00 0 ee eee ee eee 122 6 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 123 6 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples 0 124 6 5 Using FINS Applications 0 0 00 eee eee 126 6 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server 0 0 eee eee eee ee 126 6 522 FinSGatewayn es 9 Doare Seis bn MEE gee Sates ees 130 6 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs
80. 0 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 161 Conversion field 62 Counter Area 136 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits 91 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area 11 format 53 CPU Bus Units flags 90 Restart Bits 91 CPU condition field 71 CQM1 PROO1 E 40 crimp terminals xxiv CS1W CN114 40 CS1W CN2724 40 CS1W CN624 40 CS1W ETNO1 compatibility 53 CS1W ETN11 comparison 27 compatibility 53 CS1W KS001 E 40 CSV extension 73 current consumption CJ series 14 CS series 13 Custom I to 3 field 73 CX Integrator 12 40 creating routing tables 123 CX Programmer 40 connecting to PLC 2 126 from personal computer 3 through multiple segments 3 using wireless LAN 3 within same segment 2 Ethernet Unit Setup 41 Index D data areas FINS communications 158 Data Received Flag 8 80 dedicated control bits 18 DHCP client 9 dimensions 15 CJ series 14 CS series 14 DM Area 136 allocations 86 DNS client 22 DNS client function 10 DNS communications 17 DNS server 10 22 DNS Tab 50 66 Driver Tab 126 E EC Directives xxv echo response packet 52 electromagnetic fields xxiii EM Area 136 EM File Memory 7 E mail attaching files 9 mail receive function 6 9 21 mail send funct
81. 0 g max Dimensions 31 x 90 x 65 mm W x H x D 14 Specifications 1 4 2 Dimensions CS1W ETN21 EACS aa No EA D Da ia x16 x169 130 100BASE TX 10BASE T AMP 101 gt Unit mm Section 1 4 15 Specifications Section 1 4 CJ1W ETN21 n N mi vy RUN ERC SD RD LNK ET o o o oO i A j l 100M ERH TCP FTP HOST Oo D 100BASE TX 10BASE T mi 5 N Unit mm 1 4 3 Software Configuration The software supported by the Ethernet Unit runs in the layers shown in the following diagram The components that form the various layers are defined below the diagram Memory Card EM File Memory CS Cu series FTP FINS communi E i mail z Socket cation service Socket transmis E mail S reception services 7 FINS services sion R CPU Unit FINS UDP FINS TCP 9 SMTP 10 POP3 8 FTP server 6 TCP Ethernet 3 IcMP 4 ARP Unit 1 2 3 1 Ethernet Ver 2 0 The Version 2 0 Ethernet frame format is used for communications 2 IP Internet Protocol Transfers datagrams to destination nodes using IP addresses 3 ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Supports IP communications by signalling errors in data transfers 4 ARP Address Resolution Protocol Determines the Ethernet address i e physical address
82. 01 Added information on ETN11 compatible mode Page 123 Added note Page 243 Changed and added new parameter item 04 258 January 2006 The following changes were made throughout the manual added CJ1G CPULILIP changed CX Net to CX Integrator and changed CX Programmer to CX One Fage xv Removed manuals and added others and changed details for manuals W446 and 336 Pages xxiv and xxv Added precautions Page 30 Changed the reference for creating I O tables Page sei Removed model number for the CX Programmer and added information on relevant manuals Page 41 Added information on unit version restrictions Pages 74 and 75 Changed SMTP to SNTP Page 100 Removed to be included in Pages 103 and 121 Changed the reference for FINS node address settings Page 166 Changed the reference for error code details Page 188 Changed the reference page for IP network addresses Page 205 and 206 Changed the reference for FINS settings OMRON Corporation Control Devices Division H Q Shiokoji Horikawa Shimogyo ku Kyoto 600 8530 Japan Tel 81 75 344 7109 Fax 81 75 344 7149 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 2356 81 300 Fax 31 2356 81 388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 East Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 U S A Tel 1 847 843 7900 Fax 1 847 843 8568 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 83 Clemenceau
83. 098 or CMND 490 instructions have been used For the storage areas of the response codes refer to information on page 141 under 6 6 4 Writing Programs The table below lists response codes main and sub codes returned after execution of FINS commands the probable cause of errors and recom mended remedies The response codes provided here are for the Ethernet Unit Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual W227 or the operation manuals for the relevant Unit for further information on response codes The 6th 7th and 15th bits of the response codes have specific functions The 6th bit will be ON when a non fatal error has occurred in the PC at the remote node the 7th bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PC at the remote node and the 15th bit will be ON when a network relay error has occurred Refer to information given after the following table for more informa tion on relay errors Second byte Oo 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Sub response code SRES First byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Main response code MRES 1 PLC fatal error flag t 1 PLC non fatal error flag 1 Relay error flag Check point Probable cause 01 Local node error 03 Local node send error Reduce the load traffic on the Ethernet Unit Check your user applications Send error in local node was caused by lack of available space in internal buffers 05 Node address setting error The network cannot be Corre
84. 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 Ethernet Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Ethernet Unit node number 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 Ge Target PLC1 Ethernet port Ethernet Network address None FINS UDP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name Network classification Network Tab Setting PLC1 Ethernet FINS transmission source address 0 FINS destination Network number 0 Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds Driver Tab Workstation node address 1 Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 192 168 250 2 Ethernet Unit IP address Port number 126 9600 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Broadcast All ones 4 3BSD FINS UDP port Default 9600 IP address 0 0 0 0 Use default IP address Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Baud rate Automatic detection IP router table None Example Inputs to the CX Programmer s Setup Window Example Change PLC Settings Change PLC x m Device Name NewPLC1 m Device Type C516 C1G Settings m Network Type Settings Comment Cancel 12
85. 2 Unit 1 Node 2 ode 1 i Network 1 i i Network 2 Network 3 a PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3 End network relay network table relay network table local network table Local i network Unit address number To go to network 3 first go to node 2 at network 2 To go to network 3 To go to network 3 The network is the same first go to node 3 at according to the local SO 9 to node 2 at network 3 network 1 network table go Note through unit number 1 of the local CPU Rack In the above example the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC 4 from PLC 1 are shown Additional settings would be required in the rout ing tables for a message to reach PLC 1 from PLC 4 Refer to 6 4 3 Rout ing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples 6 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC Note Routing tables must be created by a CX Integrator connected to the PLC They cannot be created using a Programming Console For details on how to connect and use the CX Integrator refer to the CX ntegrator Operation Manual W445 CX Integrator is automatically installed when CX One is installed 1 When routing tables are transferred from the CX Integrator to the PLC the CPU Bus Unit is reset so that the routing tables that have been created can be read and enabled Before transferring the routing tables make sure that the devices in the system will not be adversely
86. 21 V1 41 V1 Communications Commands Refer ence Manual Describes the C series Host Link and FINS communica tions commands used when sending communications commands to CS series and CJ series CPU Units CS1G H CPU H CS1G H CPU EV1 Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CS series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1M CPU CJ1G CPU Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CS1D CPU CS1D CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1M CPU Programmable Con trollers Program ming Manual Describes programming tasks file memory and other functions for the CS series and CJ series PLCs Use togethe
87. 3 standards e Connector structure RJ45 8 pin Modular Connector conforming to ISO 8877 Connector pin Signal name Signal direction Transmission data Output Transmission data Output Reception data Input Not used Si Not used Reception data Input Not used Not used Frame ground COVN oO BR PP 2 5 2 Connecting the Cable Z Caution Turn OFF the PLC s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twisted pair cable N Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted pair cable as shown in below 35 mm 38 Creating I O Tables Section 2 6 1 2 3 1 Lay the twisted pair cable 2 Connectthe cable to the hub Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place Request cable installation from a qualified professional 3 Connect the cable to the connector on the Ethernet Unit Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place Example CS1W ETN21 RJ45 Modular Connector Be oi Ethernet Unit 2 6 Creating I O Tables 2 6 1 I O Table Overview I O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC and to allocate I O to them With CS series and CJ series PLCs whenever there is a change to the Unit configuration it is necessary to create I O tables and register the Units to the CPU Unit The I O tables can be created
88. 4 Bits 00 to 07 2nd byte OFF SNA SA1 ON DNA DA1 Check the command format and set the correct command data FINS TCP setting error 01 to 10 Connection number 01 Automati cally allo cated FINS node address duplication 02 Destina tion IP address error 03 Destina tion port number error Refer to 1 5 1 FINS Communica tions Service in this manual and the Operation Manual Construc tion of Applications SECTION 7 and set the FINS TCP settings correctly Server setting error 01 IP address 02 Host name 03 Port num ber 04 Other parameters Set the server settings correctly based on the information in the detailed error code 205 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Meaning Detailed error code Correction EE code PROM FINS TCP packet discarded 1st byte 01 to 10 Connection number 2nd byte 02 Reopened because remote node closed 03 Reopened because of reception error 04 Reopened because of transmission error 05 Reopened because RST received from remote node 06 Reopened because of no keep alive response Have the FINS TCP connection status checked when a SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruction is exe cuted in the ladder program 07 Illegal FINS TCP procedure Refer to Operation Manual Con struction of Applications SEC TION 7 and correct the remote node application on a personal computer
89. 5 CPU Bus Unit Words CIO DM 01 Recreate the data specified by the 2nd byte of the detailed error code 02 Clear memory using proce dure in the PLC operation manual CPU Unit protected 00 Remove protection from CPU Unit Saved memory 203 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Meaning Detailed error code Correction EE code PROM Resend count exceeded send failed Node address setting error send failed Remote node not in network send failed No Unit with specified unit address send failed CPU Unit error send failed Destination address not in routing tables send failed No routing table entry send failed Routing table error send failed Too many relay points send failed Command too long send failed Header error send failed Internal buffers full packet dis carded Illegal packet discarded Local node busy send failed Unexpected routing error No setting in IP address table packet discarded Service not supported in current mode packet discarded Internal send buffer full packet discarded Maximum frame size exceeded routing failed 1st byte Commands Bit 15 Bits 08 to 14 Bits 00 to 07 Responses Bit 15 Bits 08 to 14 Bits 00 to 07 2nd byte Check transceiver at remote node Set the IP address correctly Check the connection to the remote node C
90. 7 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Example Network Settings Network Tab Network Settings Ethernet xi Network Driver gt FINS Source Address Network jo Node fo 4 Unit j FINS Destination Address Network jo H Node E 4 Unit fo r Frame Length O Timeout E o0 H Host Link Unit Sumber vork Wperating Leyel45 fo 0 C H Cancel Help Note When FinsGateway is selected as the network type make sure that the frame length is set to 2 000 bytes max Example Network Settings Driver Tab Network Settings Ethernet xi Network Driver Workstation Node Number f 4 Auto detect Port Number 3600 IP Address 192 168 2350 J Cancel Help 128 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 System Configuration Example 2 Using Routing Tables In this example an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC ona Controller Link network PLC 3 below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Controller Link Unit Node address 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 CX Programmer CX Integrator Ethernet Unit ra IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Gateway between networks PLC1 Ethernet Unit node address 2 Ethernet Unit IP address 192 168
91. 7 Parameter Areas 88 227 socket option 157 Socket Service Request Switches 84 TCP IP 8 troubleshooting 227 UDP IP 8 SOCKET STATUS READ 195 235 sockets closing TCP 180 UDP 171 numbers 157 opening TCP 172 174 UDP 167 reading status 195 receiving data TCP 177 UDP 168 sending data TCP 178 UDP 169 status 80 TCP sockets status 88 235 troubleshooting 214 testing communications 181 UDP sockets troubleshooting 211 software configuration 16 Software switch field 71 specifications Ethernet Units CJ series 14 CS series 13 FINS communications 135 SRES 157 stack connections 36 startup procedure 30 static electricity xxiii precautions xxv status reading memory status 193 reading protocol status 189 reading socket status 195 STD extension 73 storage temperature CJ series 14 CS series 14 Sub net Mask field 62 subnet masks 48 95 reading from Unit 160 sub response code 156 See also SRES switches Socket Service Request Switches 84 SYSMAC BUS 2 136 SYSMAC LINK 136 system configuration 11 examples 126 T TCP Active Open Request Switch 85 TCP CLOSE REQUEST 180 TCP communications 17 sockets interface 19 status 235 troubleshooting 214 status 191 TCP indicator 26 TCP Nodes Tab 133 TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE 174 TCP OPEN REQUEST PASSIVE 172 TCP Passive Open Request Switch 85 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST 177 TCP SEND REQUEST 178 TCP IP 3 8 115 creat
92. CJ series Ethernet Units only 27 67 Command code Command Response Number of IP address Subnet mask code code addresses FINS node number Number of Addresses Response The number of sets of FINS node addresses IP addresses and subnet masks being returned The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 1 decimal FINS Node Address Response Node address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal IP Address Response The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal If the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled 0 0 0 0 is returned 197 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Subnet Mask Response The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal Response Codes 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 198 SECTION 8 Troubleshooting This section describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that sometimes occur with Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can have a negative effect on the entire network We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet Units to allow immediate recovery of the network 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators
93. Cat No W420 E1 04 Ethernet Units Construction of Networks OPERATION MANUAL CS1W ETN21 100Base TX CJ1W ETN21 100Base TX Ethernet Units Construction of Networks Operation Manual Revised January 2006 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense
94. Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal 7 3 13 PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST Requests processing to open a TCP socket The socket will wait to be con nected to another node PMU ss todd a te le Command Block Command Results storage area Local Timeout Remote IP address Remote TCP code TCP port value port number TCP socket number number Socket option Response Block Command Response code code Results Storage Format Response Remote IP address Remote code port number Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option is specified in one byte 172 Command Response Reference TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local TCP Port Number Command Timeout Value Command Remote IP Address Command Results Storage Area Remote Port Number Command Results Storage Area Precautions Section 7 3 7 SIE 0_ Bits Keep alive specification 0 Keep alive disabled 1 Keep alive enabled The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes 0 cannot be spe
95. Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or 127 e The SMTP server host name is wrong e The local mail address is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings e The POPS server and account information user name password mail address do not match Correct the communications path e Are the mailer settings correct e Are the settings correct for the POP3 and SMTP servers in the communications path e Are the Unit Setup and the mail addresses set for the servers correct e Are the destination mail addresses for remote mail commands correct e Has the network administrator set protection for mail addresses as a firewall From the response code response status refer to the section on receiving mail in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications and remove the cause of the error 221 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Clock Not being Automatically Adjusted Is the HOST indicator lit Is the SNTP error Is the HOST indicator status bit ON flashing Is the ERH indicator flashing Is 03C6 stored in the Ethernet Unit s error log Is the SNTP error status bit ON E N D 222 The automatic clock adjustment function cann
96. DOUT No remote exists 0066 Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service 0080 An open request timeout error occurred 0081 Socket was closed during opening procedure 0082 Connection could not be established with the specified remote Note These errors occur only in large multilayered networks 7 3 14 ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST Requests processing to open a TCP socket The socket will be connected to another node Command Block Command Results storage area Local TCP Remote IP Remote TCP t code TCP socket number port number address port number Socket option 174 Command Response Reference Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command TCP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local TCP Port Number Command Results Storage Area Remote IP Address Command Remote Port Number Command Section 7 3 Command Response code code Response Local port code number The socket option is specified in one byte 7 _ 0 Bits Keep alive specification 0 Keep alive disabled 1 Keep alive enabled The TCP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to p
97. Example 192 168 250 254 When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted the internal table is gener ated automatically from the various settings that have been made Depending on the setting method used data such as remote IP addresses are changed dynamically Dynamic changes can be prohibited FINS header FINS data F emote node N ni s Application level FINS ica Sa PP Node number 2 ae Transport level UDP UDP part TCP TOP por Application level FINS nace munies iS Internet level IP PEES Transport level Y s ae Physical level Ethernet UDP a a TCP UTN Ethernet address l d Internet level IR kos H IP address J The remote node s IP address UDP TCP 2 method UDP port number and TCP port Physical level Ethernet P number are calculated from the node Ethernet address 7 number in the FINS message and an x zt Ethernet frame is generated N Ethernet V2 FINS header 97 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables FINS UDP Communications Methods Automatic Generation When the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted the following values are set D
98. Except for the FINS communications service sockets all open sockets for sockets services FTP server or mail transmission are closed immediately before resetting 1001 Command too large 159 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following data from the Ethernet model version IP address sub net mask FINS UDP port number mode settings Ethernet address 05 01 Command code Command Block Response Block Command Response Model Version IP address Subnet FINS UDP Mode Ethernet address code code mask portnumber setting Parameters Model Version The Ethernet Unit mode and version are returned as ASCII characters occu Response pying 20 bytes each i e 20 characters each If all bytes are not used the remaining bytes will be all spaces ASCII 20 Hex Example Model CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Version V1 20 IP Address Subnet Mask The Ethernet Units IP address and subnet mask are returned as 4 bytes Response each FINS UDP Port Number The Ethernet Units UDP port number for FINS is returned as 2 bytes Response Mode Setting Response The mode setting in the system setup is returned 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit System setup format L Broadcast address setting IP address conversion method UDP port No setting for FINS TCP port No setting for FINS TCP Transmission speed setting SNTP server specification method SMTP server specification method POP server
99. FINS TCP method e Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS TCP method e Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications 115 FINS UDP Method Section 6 2 6 2 FINS UDP Method 6 2 1 Overview FINS UDP Features FINS UDP Frame Format 116 The FINS UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP IP protocol UDP IP is a connectionless communications protocol When a message is sent from one node to another the two nodes have an equal rela tionship and there is no clear connection If using TCP is like making a tele phone call then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand Although the UDP protocol is fast data communications are less reliable than with TCP In particular when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing the user must program measures such as retries into applications in order to improve reliability Data transmission 1 Data transmission 2 Data transmission 3 Data is sent in one direction with no confirmation of whether the data was received Because there are few procedures involved data can be sent at high speed but with less reliability than with TCP The FINS UDP method has the following features e Because FINS UDP is a connectionless protocol there is no limit to the number of corrections FINS UDP can be used for broadcasting e When data is sent via an IP network with multiple l
100. FINS TCP or TCP IP socket services are used When the keep alive function is used with FINS TCP or TCP IP socket ser vices the keep alive communications frame is used to check the status of the connection with the remote node either a server or client if there are no com munications during the time interval set here Up to nine checks are executed at 75 second intervals and if there is no response to any of them then the connection is terminated The default setting 0 is for a specified value of 120 minutes for the Liveness Checking Interval When the prescribed value is used as is it may not be suit able for control system applications Set the checking time as required for the system The setting range is 0 to 65 535 minutes E IP Router Table An IP router table is a table of correspondences for finding IP addresses for the IP routers that relay target segments when the Unit communicates via IP routers with nodes on other IP network segments 130 25 X X Network ID 130 26 X X Network ID 130 25 36 253 130 26 2 254 IP router For the IP network address set the network number i e the net ID of the other IP network segment with which communications are to be executed The length of the network number i e the number of bytes will vary depend ing on the IP address class Four bytes are reserved for setting the IP network address so set the network number from the beginning and then set 00 in the remaining
101. IP address IP address FINS response Response sent back to changed IP address With FINS TCP FINS node addresses and IP addresses in the internal table are changed with each connection that is established Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command originated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent IP address FINS command Ethernet Ethernet Unit FINS TCP server with fixed IP address IP address FINS response Response sent back to changed IP address Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service DHCP service is a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all of the IP address in a network Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP server whenever the system is started Therefore at a personal computer using the DHCP service IP addresses may be different with each system startup DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as per sonal computers that are used for client applications Nodes used for server IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 applications such as mail servers are normally allocated fixed I
102. IP address to protect SMTP Server Host name or IP address Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Server specification type POP Server Host name or IP address Unit Setup window POP Tab Server specification type SNTP Server Host name or IP address Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Server specification type Unit Setup window Setup Tab Login name Unit Setup window Setup Tab FTP Login Password Unit Setup window Setup Tab FTP Password Port No Unit Setup window Setup Tab FTP Port No Unit Setup window DNS Tab IP address of DNS server Unit Setup window DNS Tab P Address Port No Unit Setup window DNS Tab Port No Retry timer Unit Setup window DNS Tab Retry timer SMTP Unit Setup window SMTP Tab IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window SMTP Tab P Address or Host name Port No Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Port No Local mail address Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Local mail address Option Use POP before SMTP Unit Setup window SMTP Tab Use POP before SMTP 243 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G Menu item Parameter item Corresponding CX Programmer function Unit Setup window POP Tab IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window POP Tab P Address or Host name Port No Unit Setup window POP Tab Port No Mail account Unit Setup window POP T
103. MP status TCP status UDP status code code Parameters IP Status Response Twelve types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 2 3 1 Total number of IP packets received 2 The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in the packet header 3 The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header 4 The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP header data could not be stored in the first short buffer See note when an attempt was made to store the packet Refer to 7 3 26 MEMORY STA TUS READ and Appendix B Buffer Configuration 5 The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons e The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the smallest size of the IP header e The size of the first short buffer See note was smaller than the IP header length value in the IP header when storing the packet 6 The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header 7 The number of fragmented packets received 8 The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a queue for reassembly could not be secured 9 The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not be reassembl
104. Man ual Construction of Applications Automatic Clock Adjustment CX Programmer tab Settings IP Address Port No Retry timer Auto Adjust Time SNTP Server Setup Auto Adjust Time Server specification type IP Address Host name Port No Retry timer Adjust Time 51 Communications Test Web Functions Section 2 11 For details refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications CX Programmer Setting item tab Use Web function Password Port No For details refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 2 11 Communications Test If the basic settings in particular the IP address and subnet mask have been made correctly for the Ethernet Unit then it should be possible to communi cate with nodes on the Ethernet This section describes how to use the PING command to perform communi cations testing between Ethernet Units 2 11 1 PING Command 2 11 2 Ethernet Unit 52 The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is commu nicating correctly The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and responses The echo response packet is automatically returned by the ICMP The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote nodes when configuring a network The Ethernet Unit supports both th
105. P addresses Ethernet Units in PLC systems are also allocated fixed IP addresses Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Personal Computer FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method In communications involving previous models multiple communications appli cations were configured on personal computers according to data accessing uses and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS commu nications could be used on any given computer created a problem This Ethernet Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs remote nodes applications with FINS node addresses enabling dynamic changes FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer and the respective FINS UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually When FINS UDP FINS commands are sent from individual appli cations to the Ethernet Unit the respective remote IP addresses and remote port numbers in the internal table are dynamically changed With this method as well FINS nodes are allocated individually for each appli cation on the computer and the respective FINS TCP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually Each application is positioned with a FINS TCP client and requests the opening of a connection with the Ethernet Unit s FINS TCP server When the connection is established the respective remote IP address and remote port number in the internal
106. P communications 16 status 190 indicators 25 troubleshooting 200 inspections 241 installation cables connections 38 Contact Output Units 37 location xxiii precautions 34 interlock circuits xxiv INTERNODE ECHO TEST 163 internode test 10 command 163 Interval time field 71 72 IOM extension 73 IOMRead command 6 73 IOMWrite command 6 73 252 IP Address field 62 65 68 74 IP Address Table field 63 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 186 IP addresses allocating 94 configuration 94 dynamic 9 setting 46 IP communications 16 IP addresses reading from Units 160 reading tables 186 IP router tables reading 187 status 189 IP Router Table field 63 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 187 IP router tables 49 K keep alive field 65 keep alive setting 19 49 L limit circuits xxiv LNK indicator 26 Local mail address field 67 locking devices precautions xxiv Login field 63 Low Voltage Directive xxvi mail status 87 Mail Address 1 field 69 Mail Address 2 field 69 Mail address field 71 72 Mail Address Tab 51 69 Mail password field 68 mail receive function 6 9 21 mail send function 5 20 Mail Send Switch 5 20 mail triggers 5 MailLogClear command 6 73 MailLogRead command 6 73 main response code 156 See also MRES maintenance 239 media access method CJ series 14 CS series 13 memory areas See also data areas Memory Card 7 MEMORY STATUS READ 193 mode s
107. P socket active open processing refused by remote node Passively open a remote TCP socket checking the remote IP address and remote TCP port number ECONNRESET Connection reset by peer TCP socket closed by remote node Close the local socket and try reconnecting EADDRNOTAVAIL Can t assign requested address mistake in remote IP address Check the setting of the remote IP address and try reconnecting EAFNOSUPPORT Address family not supported by protocol family Close the local socket and try reopening it ENETUNREACH Network is unreachable Set the path to the remote node in the IP router table EHOSTDOWN Host is down Check the remote host and communications path EWOULDBLOCK Operation would block Close the local socket and try reopening it EHOSTUNREACH No route to host The specified node does not exist on the desig nated IP network segment Check the commu nications path ETIMEDOUT Connection timed out TCP timed out Check the remote host and communications path ESELABORT Used for internal Ethernet Unit pro cessing Close the local socket and try reopening it None Internal memory cannot be allocated for processing the service cannot be provided Traffic is too high at the Ethernet Unit Correct the user application to reduce traffic at the Ethernet Unit 228 None Timed out for passive TCP open reques
108. PU Bus Unit ser vice though is not more than two each for the CPU Unit to the Ethernet Unit and for the Ethernet Unit to the CPU Unit 141 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Execution Communications condition Port Enabled Flag Cc H H KEEP 011 A Input A remains ON from start to completion of commu nications instruction Reset B A A T Operand Creates operand and control data in a given area control data created with MOV and XFER ommunications nstructions Executes communications instructions RECV CMND Communications A Port Enabled Flag Creates reset input Turns reset BON It It DIFU 013 B after execution of communications in struction Communications A Port Error Flag HK Send Error Flag display Retry can be executed a a dt xecution Communications Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous condition Port Enabled Flag A KEEP 011 C Use exclusive control so that no other communica HY F F 7 tions instructions are started before execution of the above communications instruction is complete Reset D Continued in same way The execution status of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruc tions is always reflected by the communications flags i e the Communica tions Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag The CS CuJ series CPU Units communications
109. Receive Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the reception queue Send Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the send queue Local IP Address 4 bytes The local IP address allocated to the socket Local Port Number 4 bytes The local port number allocated to the socket Remote IP Address 4 bytes The remote IP address allocated to the socket Remote Port Number 4 bytes The remote port number allocated to the socket 195 Command Response Reference Precautions Response Codes Command Block Response Block Parameters 196 TCP Transitions 4 bytes The TCP connection status is returned as one of the numbers shown in the following table Refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of transitions Number 00 00 00 00 Stage CLOSED Section 7 3 Status Closed 00 00 00 01 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00 00 00 02 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00 00 00 03 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00 00 00 04 ESTABLISHED Already established 00 00 00 05 CLOSE WAIT Received FIN waiting to close 00 00 00 06 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00 00 00 07 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00 00 00 08 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK 00 00 00 09 FIN WAIT 2 Close completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN 00 00 00 0A TIME WAIT After closing pauses
110. SULTS READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Times Received Response Response Codes Reads the results number of times data received of the broadcast test 08 02 Command code z Command Response Times code code received The number of times the data has been received normally during the broad cast send test is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of times received is cleared each time the result is read 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 7 3 6 BROADCAST DATA SEND 164 Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network Command Response Reference Command Block Parameters Test Data Command Precautions Section 7 3 Command Test data code This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 460 bytes can be specified No response is made to this command When using this command set the FINS header parameters or the control data for the CMND 194 instruction as follows Destination node address FF broadcast data Destination unit address FE Ethernet Unit Response no response flag 1 no response 7 3 7 ERROR LOG READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Beginning Record Number Command Number of Records Command Response Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response Reads the error log Command Beginning Number code record of number records
111. Setup For details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks Use CX Integrator to make routing table settings as required CX Programmer tab Setting Setup Keep alive CX Programmer tab Settings Login Password Port No For details refer to SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications CX Programmer tab Settings IP Address Port No Retry timer Unit Setup for Particular Applications CX Programmer tab Section 2 10 Settings Server specification type IP Address Host name Port No Local mail address Use POP before SMTP Mail Address Mail address 1 Mail address 2 Send Mail Transmission trigger setting Trigger classification Interval time Mail address Transmission data classification For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Mail Reception CX Programmer tab Settings IP Address Port No Retry timer Server specification type IP Address Host name Port No Account Name Mail password Server access interval time Receive Mail Posting Mail Address Protection Setting Receive Attached File Setting Receive Command Setting For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation
112. T SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR xvii Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicabl
113. TCP IP protocol layer The TCP IP protocol layer however cannot determine where the data has been split so the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined together Therefore when using the FINS TCP method FINS TCP headers must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS frame delimiters The length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored in the header allowing the frame to be separated out by the remote node With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGateway Ver 2003 the appropriate frames are separated out automatically so there is normally no need to be pay attention to it at the application layer The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed using TCP IP this port number must be allocated for the com munications service The default setting for the FINS TCP local TCP port number i e the Ethernet Unit s TCP port number is 9600 To set another number make the setting for the FINS TCP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup The FINS TCP port number set in the Unit Setup is used by the FINS TCP server s TCP socket The FINS TCP client s TCP socket uses any TCP port number that can be used at that node With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGate way Ver 2003 an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized At the Ethernet Unit a TCP IP frame that is received is recognized
114. TTP Server Setup Contents Default Use Web Func Select to use or prohibit the Web Checked Web func tion function Deselect this option to pro tion is used hibit use of the Web function Password Sets the password for accessing None the Ethernet Unit s settings and sta ETHERNET is used tus monitoring information using a Web browser Port No Sets the port No used to connect to 0 80 is used the Web browser For details refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function Note 1 The HTTP Server Setup is supported by Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later 2 Make settings using the unit settings function in the CX Programmer to be included in version 5 0 and higher or using the Web function refer to Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function 75 HTTP Section 3 10 76 SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units 4 1 ClO Area Allocations 0000000 eee eee eens 78 4 2 DM Area Allocations 0 0 00000 ccc ee eee e eee nee 86 4 3 Auxiliary Area Data oise shone Ee bE See PERG eB AE 90 77 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 4 1 78 CIO Area Allocations The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation Begin
115. The UDP port number is the number used for UDP identi fication of the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case e Default 9 600 e User defined Setting range 1 to 65 535 Note Make the settings so that UDP port number 123 for SNTP does not overlap with UDP port number 53 for DNS 9 600 FINS TCP Port Specify the local TCP port number to be used for the FINS communica tions service The TCP port number is the number used for TCP identifi cation of the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case e Default 9 600 e User defined Setting range 1 to 65 535 Note Make the settings so that TCP port numbers 20 and 21 for the FTP server TCP port number 25 for SMTP TCP port number 110 for POP3 and TCP port number 53 for DNS do not overlap Conversion 62 Select any of the following as the method for finding and converting IP addresses from FINS node addresses Enabled for FINS UDP only e Automatic generation dynamic Auto dynamic e Automatic generation static Auto Static e IP address table method Table used Combined method Mixed Auto dynamic Setup Section 3 1 Item Contents Default Destination IP Address Change Dynamically Select to dynamically change the remote destination IP address for FINS UDP To prohibit dynamic changes deselect this box Checked Change Dynami cally Baud Rate Selec
116. Turns Operation Manual Con ON when open request is received struction of Applica OFF when open processing has tions SECTION 6 been completed Receiving Flag ON during receive processing Turns ON when receive request is received OFF when receive processing has been completed Sending Flag ON during send processing Turns ON when send request is received OFF when send processing has been completed Closing Flag ON during close processing Turns ON when close request is received OFF when close processing has been completed Not used Data Received Flag ON when data from a remote node Operation Manual Con has been received at an open TCP _ struction of Applica socket tions SECTION 6 OFF when receive processing has been requested for an open TCP socket Results Storage ON if there is an error in storing the Error Flag results when socket services are used by means of the CMND 490 instruction Turns OFF when the next request is received Connected by TCP TCP UDP Open ON when open processing has been Flag completed OFF when close processing has been completed Stays OFF for abnormal open processing comple tion Note The status of these flags can also be checked using the software switch set tings on the CX Programmer Opening Flag Bit 0 Turns ON when an open request is received either by control bit mani
117. W ETN21 Ether net Unit from one of the previous models CS1W ETNO1 11 or CJ1W ET11 For details refer to 2 12 Converting from Previous Models 31 Switch Settings Section 2 2 2 2 2 CJ series Ethernet Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 UNIT Setting range No OtoF 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CU series PLCs dedicated areas are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Alloca tions Setting the Node Address Note Relation to IP Addresses 32 With the FINS communications service when there are multiple Ethernet Units connected to the Ethernet network the Ethernet Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network Setting range 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The top switch sets the sixteens digit most significant d
118. WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA FILL Writes the same data to the specified range of I O memory area words MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of specified non consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Copies the contents of consecutive I O memory area words to another I O memory area Parameter area access PARAMETER AREA READ Reads the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA FILL CLEAR Writes the same data to the specified range of parameter area words Program area access PROGRAM AREA READ Reads the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA WRITE Writes to the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Clears the UM User Memory area Operating mode changes RUN Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to RUN or MONITOR STOP Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to PROGRAM Machine configura tion reading CPU UNIT DATA READ Reads CPU Unit data CONNECTION DATA READ Reads the model numbers of the device corresponding to addresses Status reading CPU UNIT STATUS READ Reads the status of the CPU Unit CYCLE TIME READ Reads the maximum minimum and average cycle time Time data access CLOCK READ Reads the present year month date minut
119. We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet Units to allow immediate recovery of the network Replacing an Ethernet Unit Observe the following precautions when replacing the Ethernet Unit e Always turn OFF the power supply before replacing the Ethernet Unit e Check that the spare Ethernet Unit is operating normally before replacing a defective Unit with it e When returning a defective Unit for repairs provide as much written information as possible on the symp toms of the problem e If a problem occurs with poor contacts wipe the contacts with a clean cloth soaked with industrial alcohol Carefully remove any lint remaining on the contacts before replacing the Unit Settings after Replacing an Ethernet Unit After replacing an Ethernet Unit set the following to the same settings as were used on the previous Unit e Unit number e Node address Settings after Replacing a CPU The EEPROM in the PC s CPU holds the information listed below This information must be stored in any new CPU used to replace a defective one e Routing tables e System Setup for the Ethernet Unit 239 Appendix F Inspections Carry out regular inspections to ensure the Ethernet Unit is functioning perfectly Items Most of the parts that make up an Ethernet Unit are semiconductor components None of the parts in the Unit will wear out after a specific lifetime but some parts may deteriorate due to extreme operating condition Therefo
120. a Uon Connecting to the Ethernet Unit without making any settings Setting only the IP address not making other Unit settings for simple application or operating with only the Programming Setting system settings freely setting possible with CX Programmer or Web function Use the default IP address 3 2 See note 2 Console setting possible with CX Programmer or Programming Console See note 1 t i Refer to P Set local IP address in DM Area words allocated for CPU Unit Units Set the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit setup area Address in 2 9 Basic Settings Perform Unit setup Create IP router tables Check communications PING command and or echo test Note 1 30 Refer to IP Address in 2 9 Basic Settings Refer to IP Address in 2 9 Basic Settings Refer to 4 2 DM Area Allocations Refer to 6 4 Creating Routing Tables Routing tables must be set to enable the following e Using the FINS communications service e Using the CMND instruction with more than one Communications Unit mounted to the PLC Refer to SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup Refer to IP Address in 2 9 Basic Settings See note 5 Refer to 2 10 Unit Setup for Particular Applications Used mainly when a Programming Console is used to set only the local IP address set in allocated DM words W
121. a through the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the SNTP server via the intranet 6 Host Name Designation The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit s IP ad dress from the DNS server via the intranet Network Security and Firewalls Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security con siderations Before doing so be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider installing a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications company Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 3 Ethernet Unit with a Global Address Intranet CX Programmer etc FINS TCP client computer Ethernet Communications over Internet Private address Not output to Internet Internet Global address required A i Not output to Internet trangt aloe ee es a nee I L_ Global address i IP router Pri Priv ri Private address ate address Firewall Ethernet Communications in intranet Conditions for Using Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the follow Communications ing conditions Applications 1 2 3 1 FINS Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer with a FINS a
122. ab Account Name Mail password Unit Setup window POP Tab Mail password Server access interval time Unit Setup window POP Tab Server access interval time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab IP Address or Host name Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab P Address or Host name Port No Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Port No Auto Adjust Time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Auto Adjust Time Adjust Time Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Adjust Time Retry timer Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Retry timer Option Get the time info from the SNTP server Unit Setup window Auto Adjust Time Tab Get the time information from the SNTP server Unit Setup window HTTP Tab WEB Password Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Password WEB Password Confirm None for confirmation of Web password Port No Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Port No Option Use Web Function Unit Setup window HTTP Tab Use Web Function IP address router table Unit Setup window Setup Tab IP address table Unit Setup window Setup Tab P Address Table IP router table Unit Setup window Setup Tab P Router Table FINS TCP Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Connection 1 8 Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab No 1 to 8 FINS TCP server client Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab FINS TCP M
123. ables and correct the settings using the procedures described in this section 58 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 7 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and return the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address to its original setting 8 Turn ON the power to the PLC Node address Indicators x16 x16 RUN ERC ee f no won Converting from ETN21 Mode to ETN11 Mode 1 Turn OFF the power to the PLC and set the Ethernet Unit s rotary switches for the node address as follows Node address Indicators o o Not non non 2 Turn ON the power to the PLC The Unit s indicators will change as follows Node address Indicators po o Nom m non 3 Setthe rotary switches for the node address to OF There will be no change to the indicators Node address Indicators o F Not Lt Notit 4 Set the rotary switches for the node address to FF The RUN indicator will begin to flash Node address Indicators Lit 5 Set the rotary switches for the node address to OF The Unit mode change function will start and the ERH indicator will flash for approximately five seconds Node address Indicators Co F _ Fasting t Flashing 6 After the mode has been changed the indicators will appear as shown be low depending on whether the change was completed normally or if an er ror occurred e If the Mode Change was Completed Normally
124. age 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The TCP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes An available TCP port number is automatically assigned if 0 is speci fied The TCP port numbers allocated to the open socket are stored in the Results Storage Area The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit s communications services can not be specified TCP port No used for FTP server Default 20 21 TCP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 e TCP port No used for SMTP server access Default 25 TCP port No used for POP server access Default 110 e TCP port No used for HTTP server Default 80 Specify the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Specify the remote TCP port number must be non zero 175 Command Response Reference Response Codes Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 7 3 Response code Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small TCP socket number is out of range Remote IP address or the remote TCP port number is 0 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area The specified socket connection is already open or is being opened 176 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service
125. age Area designation Data Received Flag Bit 13 This bit turns ON when data is received from a remote node at an open TCP socket Linked to this flag the number of bytes of data saved in the reception buffer is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket in the words allo cated in the DM Area The bit is turned OFF when a receive request is made by either bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction If any data remains in the reception buffer after the receive request processing is complete the number of bytes is stored in Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket and the Data Received Flag turns ON again The status of this flag is checked before a receive request is executed Results Storage Error Flag Bit 14 Turns ON if there is an error in the Results Storage Area for a socket service request open receive send close made using CMND 490 This flag turns ON at the same time as the services request processing flags bits 0 to 3 turn OFF It remains ON until the next services request is received and then it turns OFF again When this flag turns ON check the set values in the Results Storage Area The Results Storage Error Flag does not operate when socket services are requested by control bit manipulation TCP UDP Open Flag Bit 15 Remains ON while a socket is open by means of control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction In the case of TCP it indicates a connection When the socket is closed this flag turns
126. allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for Ethernet Units Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses Section 6 provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands Section 7 describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that are returned by the Ethernet Unit Section 8 describes information and procedures that can be used to troubleshoot problems that some times occur with Ethernet Unit and Ethernet communications Appendices provide information on Ethernet network parameters the buffer configuration TCP status transitions ASCII characters maintenance and inspections The related Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications W421 provides the follow ing information Section Contents Section 1 Overview of functions for constructing applications Section 2 Information on using mail functions to automatically send I O memory data from OMRON PLCs to personal computers Section 3 Information on using mail functions to send commands from OMRON PLCs to per sonal computers Section 4 Information on transferring large files between personal computers and OMRON PLCs Section 5 Information on automatically adjusting the OMRON PLC s built in clock Section 6 Information on communicating between general applications applications not using FINS and OMRON PLCs Section 7 Information on using perso
127. ank A EA_E00000 to EA_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank B EB_E00000 to EB_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank C EC_E00000 to EC_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Current bank E00000 to E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Note The variable types area designations given in parentheses can also be used allowing CV series or CVM1 programs to be more easily corrected for use with CS Cu series PLCs Word and Bit Addresses Three bytes of data are used to express data memory addresses of PLCs The most significant two bytes give the word address and the least significant byte gives the bit number between 00 and 15 The word address combined with the bit number expresses the bit address The bit number is always 00 because Ethernet Units can handle only word data i e individual bits cannot be addressed H E Specifies the bit position between 00 and OF 0 to 15 for bit data Specifies the address of the corresponding word Variable type Word addresses for specific memory area words can be calculated by con verting the normal decimal word address to hexadecimal and adding it to the first word in the Addresses for communications column in the above table For example the address for communications for D00200 would be 0000 from above table plus C8 decimal 200 converted to hexadecimal or 00C8 158 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 Command Response Reference Note 7 3 1 RESET Command Blo
128. ard Initialize the Memory Card If the problem persists y replace the Memory Card if necessary Is the Memory Card faulty END 217 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 File Transfer Problems File transfer problem occurred Are you not connected to the FTP server Return to the previous procedure Make MEMCARD or EM the current directory execute cd MEMCARD or cd EM s the file you are attempting to get not actuall on the Memory Card Can you execute get Designate a file actually in the file system s there insufficient free space available in the file system Can you Y gt Delete unneeded files or use a different Memory Card execute put Return to Startup Problems s the data in th file transferred with put or get normal i e not corrupted Y Use the type command and change the file data type to binary before executing put or get END 218 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 6 Network Connection Problems Go through the procedure in Startup Problems before starting this procedure e Firmly secure the cable Is the twisted pair cable secured Is the LNK indicator lit e Use straight cable Is the twisted pair Cable between the Ethernet Uni and the hub straight cable e Replace first the twisted pair cable then the hub and then the Ethernet
129. arge 1002 Command too small 1003 The number of bytes sent does not match the amount of data 1100 The TCP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of range 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 1103 Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area 220F The specified socket is sending data 2210 No connection could be established to the specified socket 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 179 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code Description Normal Connection to the remote socket was broken during transmis sion EPIPE Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 0042 see note An error occurred EMSGSIZE 0044 see note Received ICMP data ENOPROTOOPT 0045 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENETUNREACH 004F see note Received ICMP data EHOSTDOWN 0051 see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOSTUNREACH 0053 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT 0081 The specified socket was closed during transmission Note These errors occur only in large multilayered netwo
130. as a FINS frame according to the remote TCP port number in the frame FINS TCP allows up to 16 FINS TCP connections to be established simulta neously and these 16 connections are managed at the Ethernet Unit by con nection numbers When setting connections by means of the FINS TCP settings in the CX Programmer s Unit Setup set them individually using these connection numbers 119 FINS TCP Method FINS TCP Communications Procedure Personal computer Client Example IP address C FINS node number A 120 Connection established ml Local node No sent FINS node number A sent Remote node No received Remote node No received FINS node number B sent Section 6 3 FINS TCP Connection Status Word n 23 While a connection with a remote node is established the bit corresponding to the FINS TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit words allocated in the CIO Area The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi nated by a communications error or a FINS command i e FINS TCP CON NECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 n 23 Bit 15 corresponds to connection No 16 bit 00 to connection No 1 etc With FINS TCP FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a connection is established This makes it possible to determine the FINS node addresses to which the 16 connection numbers and to manage them in an internal table
131. as an Ethernet Unit due to noise generated by the contact outputs Use one or more of the following measures when installing Contact Output Units and Ethernet Units on the same Rack Mounting Location Mount or connect any Contact Output Units as far away from the Ethernet Unit as possible Contact Output Unit l Transceiver Hub d E Contact outputs je Cable Location Separate the transceiver cable or twisted pair cable connecting the Ethernet Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible The coax ial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and their wiring as possible Ethernet Unit g Contact outputs A E Ethernet Unit transceiver hub Hub Measures Attach several ferrite cores designed for EMI countermeasures on the trans ceiver cable or twisted pair cable near the hub The transceiver must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and their wiring as possible Contact Output Unit Ethernet Unit Ferrite core Transceiver Hub F Transceiver cable o 37 Connecting to the Network Section 2 5 2 5 Connecting to the Network 2 5 1 Ethernet Connectors The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted pair cable e Electrical specifications Conforming to IEEE802
132. ation manual The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than those calculated with the methods given here Among the causes of longer delays are the following traffic on the network window sizes at network nodes traffic through the Ethernet Unit e g socket servicing FTP server communications etc and the system configuration Example Calculations The following example shows calculations for sending 256 words between two PLC nodes using SEND 090 Calculations are shown in the following table Conditions Local node CPU cycle time 10 ms Local node CPU execution mode Normal Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Remote node CPU cycle time 5 ms Remote node CPU execution mode Normal Remote node CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculation CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time 0 4 ms local node Transmission processing time Transmission delay 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms 5ms 0 2 ms Reception processing time CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Total 104 0 44 1 14 034 154 5 02 18 5 ms 149 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 RECV 098 The transmission delay for the RECV 098 instr
133. atus FINS 0601 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Protocol status aaa IP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ IP status ICMP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ ICMP status TCP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ TCP status 2762 2763 UDP status FINS 2762 PROTOCOL STATUS READ UDP status Memory status FINS 2763 MEMORY STATUS READ Socket status FINS 2764 SOCKET STATUS READ Fins status Ethernet Unit s internal node table Mail log RECEIVE MAIL READ MAIL LOG Error log FINS 2102 READ ERROR LOG Send mail status Mail send status 1 to 8 Web Function Password To prevent unauthorized access to the Ethernet Unit from a Web browser password entry is required to enable display and setting of the parameters Even if the password has not been set the default password ETHER NET must be entered To change this password set a new password in the HTTP Tab of the CX Program mer s Unit Setup or use the Web function and select Settings IP address and Protocols HTTP Note 1 Setting a new Web function password as soon as possible is recommended to prevent unauthorized access 2 The Web function can also be disabled by setting in the Web function option Using the Web Function Setting Password The Ethernet Units Web window is displayed by accessing the following URL from the Web browser URL http Ethernet Unit s IP address 0 Use the following procedure to set the U
134. ayers such as the Internet communications reliability drops The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending and receiving data on an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 ia UDP FINS frame FCS UDP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS UDP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame UDP frame and FINS frame A UDP data sec tion FINS frame that exceeds 1 472 bytes is split into packets for transmis sion The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP IP protocol layer There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this split but it may not be possible to send 1 472 byte UDP packets over an IP network with multiple layers When using the FINS communications service in a system such as this select the FINS TCP method FINS UDP Method UDP Port Numbers for FINS UDP Section 6 2 The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed by UDP IP this port number must be allocated to the communi cations service The default setting for the FINS UDP local UDP port number i e the Ether net Unit s UDP port number is 9600 To set another number make the setting for the FINS UDP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup At the Ethernet Unit a UDP IP frame received with a FINS UDP port number is recognized as a FINS frame
135. but a value of only up to the maximum value 1 984 bytes that can be set for receive requests by manipulating control bits or using CMND 490 is stored 0000 hex 0 bytes 07CO hex 1 984 bytes The Data Received Flag in the ClO Area turns ON and OFF linked to this word This area is given a value of 0000 hex when a receive request is exe cuted by manipulating control bits or using the CMND 490 instruction If any data remains in the reception buffer after the receive request processing is completed the remaining number of bytes is stored and the Data Received Flag turns ON again Before a receive request is executed a check is performed to confirm that the required data is available TCP Socket No 1 to 8 Connection Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 9 to m 16 Ne f L TCP connection status The connection status for each TCP socket is stored by code in this word For details refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions Socket Services Parameter Area 1 to 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Offset Socket Socket No 1 No 8 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 m 18 is m 88 Socket option UDP TCP socket number 1 to 8 1 m 19 m 89 Local UDP TCP port number 0000 to FFFF Hex 2 m 20 m 90 Remote IP address m 21 m 91 00000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex 4 m 22 m 92 Remote UDP TCP port number 0000 to FFFF Hex 5 m 23 m 93 Number of send receive bytes 0000 to 07CO Hex 1984
136. by broadcasting based on the target IP address 16 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 5 UDP User Datagram Protocol Performs data communications Data resends priority control flow control and other measures to ensure communications reliability are not per formed for UDP communications so the transmitted data may not arrive at the destination node To increase reliability it is necessary to program spe cial measures into the user applications TCP Transmission Control Protocol Performs communications after establishing a connection i e a virtual cir cuit with the destination node providing a highly reliable communications service FINS Factory Interface Network Service A protocol that sends messages between PLCs on any of various OMRON FA networks To ensure that transmitted messages arrive at the destination node it is necessary to program special measures such as retry process ing into the user s applications FTP File Transfer Protocol Transfers data files SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A communications protocol for sending e mail by TCP IP POP3 Post Office Protocol Ver 3 0 A communications protocol for receiving e mail by TCP IP SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol A communications protocol for automatic clock adjustment by UDP IP DNS Domain Name System A communications protocol for determining IP address names according to UDP IP and TCP IP 1 5 Overview
137. c tion will be terminated If a remote node turns OFF without warning the connection will remain open indefinitely so this option should be used whenever possible For details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks 65 DNS Section 3 3 3 3 DNS Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit DNS Server Setup IP Address Contents Set the IP address for the DNS server The DNS server is required when specifying the POP3 SMTP or SNTP servers by host name for the mail send function or mail receive function Default Set the port to be used for connecting to the DNS server This setting does not normally need to be changed 0 Number 53 is used Retry timer 66 Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec tion to the DNS server fails This setting does not normally need to be changed 0 10 ms SMTP Section 3 4 3 4 SMTP Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adius 4 gt IP Address Host name Port No Local mail address I Use POP before SMTP C Host Name 0 0 0 default 25 SMTP Server Setup Item Server specifi cation type C51G CJ1G CPU45 Contents Select whether the SMTP server used for send ing mail is to be specified by IP address or the host s domain nam
138. c When FINS Command is Received generation method FINS node number dynamic nane ames Internal table address table Changed R j 153 218 51 10 FINS response returned Note When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a FINS command this is sent to the IP address in the internal table Prohibiting Dynamically Changing Remote IP Addresses For Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later methods used to dynamically change remote IP addresses automatic generation IP address table or com bined mixed method can be prohibited protected against Use the CX Pro grammer unit setting function version 5 0 and higher or Web function setting window to make this setting When dynamically changing remote destination IP addresses is prohibited the internal table for each method is maintained in the state when the power was turned ON or restarted Therefore protection can be provided against access using FINS UDP from personal computers or other devices that have dynamically changing IP addresses To prohibit protect from dynamic changes deselect the Change Dynamically option in the Setup Tab of the Unit Setup 100 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Ethernet Unit GPU Bus Unit 21x File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP r Broadcast FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port
139. cal IP address in the allocated words in the DM Area when using the CPU Bus Unit System Setup at its default settings i e for simple operation The setting is usually made with a Programming Console Application Setting device Setting area Remarks Simple operation i e The CPU Programming Con Allocated words in The setting in the allocated words in Unit Bus System Setup is used at sole CX Program the DM Area the DM Area is enabled only when the its default settings Only the IP mer can also be IP address in the CPU Unit Bus Sys address is set used tem Setup is set to 0 0 0 0 If the IP address in the CPU Unit Bus System Setup is set to a value other than 00 00 00 00 this value is stored in the allocated words in the DM Area Operation with the CPU Unit Bus CX Programmer CPU Unit Bus Sys The IP address set in the CPU Unit Bus System Setup set as desired i e tem Setup System Setup is stored in the allocated The default settings are not used words in the DM Area Replacing the previous CS1W The IP address is set using a rotary ETN01 CS1W ETN11 and using switch in the previous CS1W ETNO1 the previous settings CS1W ETN11 Ethernet Units In the new Ethernet Units the IP address set with the rotary switch is displayed in the DM Area This area is backed up by the battery so the IP address can be used without resetting Note 1 If a value other than 00 00 00 00 is set as the local IP address in
140. ceived will be stored in the results stor age area Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified The maximum control time between receiving the receive request and storing the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time will be unlimited if the value is set to 0 The IP address of the node sending data is stored in hexadecimal The port number of the node sending data The data sent from the remote node If a packet is received which contains more bytes than the number specified in Number of reception bytes specified in the command the specified number of bytes will be stored and the remainder of the bytes will be discarded Response code Description Normal IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small UDP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area The specified socket is currently receiving data The specified socket is not open High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Response code Description Normal Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service A receive request timeout er
141. cified The following ports used for the Ethernet Unit s communications services can not be specified TCP port No used for FTP server Default 20 21 TCP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 e TCP port No used for SMTP server access Default 25 e TCP port No used for POP server access Default 110 e TCP port No used for HTTP server Default 80 The maximum control time between receiving the open request and storing the result If this set time limit is exceeded the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code The value is set in units of 0 1 s The timeout time is unlimited if the value is set to 0 Specify the remote node s IP address If all zeroes are set no remote node is specified and connection is awaited from any node If any other value is set connection is awaited from the specified remote node The IP address of the connected remote node will be stored in the results storage area Specify the remote TCP port number with this command If all zeroes are set no remote TCP port number is specified If any other value is set it specifies the TCP port number of the remote node The TCP port number of the con nected remote node will be stored in the results storage area Processing varies as shown in the table below according to the specified com bination of remote IP address and remote TCP port number Remote IP address Remote TCP port Description All connec
142. ck Response Block Precautions Response Codes This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to Ethernet Units and the responses to each command The command response and where applicable the results storage blocks are given with the commands in graphic form as shown in the following dia gram If the data is fixed it is included in the blocks If the data is variable it is described following the blocks Each box represents 1 byte every two boxes represents 1 word The following diagram shows 2 bytes or 1 word Two bytes The results storage format is the format used to store transfer results and data for socket services requested with command codes 2701 to 2714 Response codes applicable to the command are described at the end of the command description If any UNIX error codes are generated these are also described Refer to your UNIX error symbol definition file usr include sys errno h for details UNIX errors are returned in the results storage area Except for special cases all send receive data is in hexadecimal format Reset the Ethernet Unit Command code A Command Response code code No response will be returned if the command ends normally A response will be returned only if an error occurs In some cases send requests SEND 192 RECV 193 instructions made from the PLC to the Ethernet Unit just before execution of the RESET com mand may not be executed
143. cket Services 2 2 53 Shows bieetbeet Pee det ben 18 1 5 3 FTP Server Function 0 0 0 0c ee eee eee 20 1 5 4 Mail Send Function 00 0 eee eee 20 1 5 5 Mail Receive Function 00 0 0 ce eee eee eee 21 1 5 6 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 22 1 5 7 Specifying Servers by Host Name 000 22 1 6 Nomenclature and Functions 000 eee eee eee 23 1 6 1 Component Names 0 0 eee eee eee eee 23 1 6 2 Indicators ses vec gay E E ea eit oa lees 25 1 7 Comparison with Previous Models 0 000020 e eee eee eee 27 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Information 00 0 00 000005 28 Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 1 1 Ethernet Unit Function Guide 1 1 1 Overall System Configuration Example The following diagram shows an example of an overall system configuration using Ethernet Units 1 Connecting the CX Programmer to the PLCs online via Ethernet gt CX Programmer SJ Mail software pa Y S Mail FINS La Mal r Internet IP router 5 Transferring large data files between 6 Configuring an independent communications protocol R i personal computers and PLCs for the host application using TCP IP UDP IP nirane wee Fir
144. ct the local IP address accessed because the IP address setting is not correct Local IP address 07 Local node busy cannot send Correct the user application to reduce traffic at the Ethernet Unit The internal buffers are full because there is too much traf fic at the local node preventing data from being sent System load 02 Remote node error 01 Remote node not in network Set IP address of remote node into IP address table and if inter network transmission is required into the IP router table IP address of remote node not set correctly in IP address table or IP router table IP address table IP router table 02 No such Unit Check the remote node s unit address and make sure the cor rect one is being used in the con trol data No node with the specified unit address Control data in instruction 05 Response timeout Check the protocol and controller status by reading them with FINS commands Increase the num ber of transmit retry attempts Message packet was corrupted by transmission error Response to CONTROLLER STATUS READ and PROTOCOL STATUS READ FINS command Increase the value for the response monitor time in the control data Control data in instruction Response time out response watchdog timer interval too short Read out the error log and cor rect as required The transmission frame may be corrupted or the internal R
145. d FileList File List Read e ErrorLogClear Error Log Clear e UMBackup User Memory e MailLogRead Mail Log Read Backup e MailLogClear Mail Log Clear e PARAMBackup Parameter Area e Test Mail Test Backup e FinsSend FINS Command e IOMWrite I O Memory Write Send IOMRead I O Memory Read To use the mail receive function there must be a separate POPS server on the network Aside from the IP address the host name used for DNS service can be specified for the POP3 server Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Reference Mail software Sending e mail ie F Internet IP router NN j 7 Intranet Firewall a aaa Server room i 1 gt i L Mail software i Pa i E p 1 1 1 1 Li Pry ges l A DNS server l POP3 server l PA l l l SMTP server SNTP server Sending e mail Ethernet Ethernet Production line P Writing command File attachment enabled Ethernet l l l l l l l l l l l I l Writing command l File attachment enabled l l l l l l l Receiving e mail SEEE EEE EO EEEE SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Exchanging Large Files between a Personal Computer and PLC Operation Reference Use the FTP server function The FTP server function makes it possible to l
146. d response data for a broadcast address Check the header parameters in the command data and be sure the correct command format is being used Troubleshooting with Response Codes Main code 11 Parame ter error Sub code 00 Parameter error Check point Parameters in command data Probable cause The parameters in the com mand data are incorrect The UDP TCP socket number was not within the proper range The local UDP port number might be set to 0 Section 8 5 Remedy Check the parameters Be sure the socket number is between 1 and 8 Set the Local UDP port number correctly 01 No area specification Memory area code in command data A correct memory area code has not been used or EM Area is not available Check the command s memory area code in the Results Storage Area and set the appropriate code 03 Address specification out of range First word address in com mand data The first word is in an inacces sible area or the bit number is not 00 Set a first word that is in an accessible area The bit number must be 00 for Ethernet Units 04 Address range exceeded Command data The address set in the com mand is not correct Correct the address in the com mand data being sure that the start address plus the number of words does not exceed accessi ble memory OB Response too long Command data The response frame is too long C
147. d ICMP packets discarded because the type indica tion code was out of range The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall packet length value in the packet header was smaller than the minimum ICMP packet length The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect checksum value in the packet header The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP head er length value in the packet header did not match the lengths of individual header types The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a response Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input The 19 sta tistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Command Response Reference TCP Status Response 1 2 3 Section 7 3 Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information request reply Address mask request Address mask reply Three types 46 items of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexa decimal value 1 Connection Information 60 Bytes Fifteen items are returned
148. d by TCP IP protocol in hexadecimal If the IP address table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP address table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set to the automatic generation method Response code Description Normal Command too large Command too small IP address conversion method is set to the automatic genera tion method 7 3 24 IP ROUTER TABLE READ Command Block Reads the IP router table Command Number code of records 187 Command Response Reference Response Block Parameters Number of Records Command Response Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Number of Stored Records Response IP Router table Records Response Precautions Response Codes 188 Section 7 3 Command Response Maximum Number Number IP router ee IP router code code number ofstored of records table records table records of stored records records The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 0 to 8 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be returned The response returns the actual number of records read The maximum number of r
149. d conditions are not set Correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings The mail address set in the Unit Setup is wrong Correct the mistake Note Set the destination mail address correctly If it is incorrect mail will stay at the SMTP server Correct the information in the mail transmission settings in the Unit Setup e Make the settings for the required user data error log data status data and file attachments Clear the following errors e If a user created mail address is wrong then correct it e There may be too much of a load traffic at the Ethernet Unit Adjust the applications Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Mail Not being Received START Is the HOST indicator lit Is the SMTP POPS or Is the HOST indicator flashing Is the ERH indicator flashing Are there response lt fo remote mail commands Is the user mail transmission status 0 The mail reception function and response mail transmission cannot be used because no IP address or host name is set for the POP3 SMTP server Using the CX Programmer make the SMTP and POP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too There is a mistake in the Unit Setup
150. d specifi cations To remove these limitations it is necessary to change the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup format from ETN11 mode to ETN21 mode Refer to Changing the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format below for instructions on how to make the change 53 Converting from Previous Models 54 Note Section 2 12 If the format change is from ETN11 mode to ETN21 mode then there will be no effect on previous applications If the change is from ETN21 mode to ETN11 mode however then certain limitations will go into effect The following table shows the limitations that apply when operating in ETN11 mode Item Specifications in ETN11 mode Baud rate e Automatic detection 100Base TX or 10Base T FINS node address setting range 1 to 254 IP address conversion Automatic generation method e Dynamic only TCP keep alive e No time setting Uses default setting FINS TCP e Server only for all connections Uses default setting TCP socket services e Socket option keep alive setting Yes e Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket Nos 1 to 8 Yes e Data Received Flag Yes FTP server function e Port No setting No Uses default setting Mail send function e The specifications for previous Units apply e The mail transmission status is as follows e Status of user mail transmission gt Status of transmission condition setting 5 e Status of periodic mail trans
151. d that uses the TCP IP protocol TCP IP is a connection type communications protocol Before a message is sent from one node to another it is necessary to establish a vir tual circuit i e a connection Once a connection has been established com munications are quite reliable The arrival of data that is sent via the connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement ACK response and retries are executed automatically as required The FINS TCP method has been newly added to the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units When FINS TCP is used it must be determined which node is the server and which is the client For communications between a personal computer and a PLC the computer should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server For communi cations between two PLCs either one can be set as the client and the other as the server Node Client Node Server Request to establish a connection Connection established _ a Acknowledgement Acknowledgement _ a al An acknowledgement is received whenever a connection is established or data is sent so transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower Compared to the FINS UDP method the FINS TCP method has the following characteristics e Data transmission is more reliable due to factors such as retry process ing at the TCP IP layer The FINS TCP method is thus better suited to dealing with communications errors in an
152. ddress setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 Remote IP address set to 0 Remote TCP port number set to 0 Connection already established with specified remote node Specified connection number not set as FINS TCP client in Unit Setup Remote node change processing for specified connection number aborted because change request received during pro cessing 7 3 20 FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ Command Block Response Block Reads the FINS TCP connection status afaj Command FINS TCP code connection No NN en pm n pe ee T Command Response FINS TCP Connection Local IP address Local TCP Remote IP connection service port number address port number code code Parameters FIFINS TCP Connection No Command Response Connection Service Response Local IP Address Response Local TCP Port Number Response Remote IP Address Response Remote TCP TCP transition Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status is to be read Response Specifies the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status was read Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS TCP connection as a number 0003 FINS TCP server 0004 FINS TCP client Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal Sp
153. ding informa tion regarding other nodes and so on 6 6 1 Communications Specifications The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Item Specifications Destination 1 1 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 instructions 1 N SEND 090 CMND 490 instructions broadcasting Data length SEND 090 990 words 1 980 bytes max broadcasting 727 words 1 454 bytes RECV 098 990 words 1 980 bytes max CMND 490 1 990 bytes max broadcasting 1 462 bytes after FINS com mand code 135 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Note Item Data contents Section 6 6 Specifications The following data is sent and received with the execution of each instruction SEND 090 Sends request for remote node to receive data and receives response data RECV 098 Sends request for remote node to send data and receives response data CMND 490 Sends any FINS command and receives response data Communications port number Ports 0 to 7 Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously Response moni tor time 0000 2 s default 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6 553 5 s in 0 1 s increments specified by user Number of retries 1 The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange be tween the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC 0 to 15 retries BUS 2 Remote I O Systems 2 Whe
154. e attach a CS CJ series Key Sheet and then connect the Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port It cannot be con nected to the RS 232C port 2 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables 40 Note The procedure for creating I O tables is shown here taking as an example I O tables that is generated automatically for a PLC connected online In this example a Programming Console is used for creating the I O tables For an explanation of how to create I O tables using a CX Programmer refer to the CX Programmer User s Manual Use the following procedure to create the I O tables With the CJ Series it is necessary to create I O tables only when I O alloca tion is performed by the user With the CS Series it is always necessary to create I O tables Initial screen Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 2 7 Unit Setup Procedure Use the CX Programmer Ver 3 20 or higher for the Ethernet Unit Setup and follow the procedure described below Some functions added with unit version 1 3 require CX Programmer version 5 0 or higher for setting 1 2 3 1 Connect the CX Programmer online The CX Programmer can be connected to the PLC in either of the following ways a Connect the personal computer to the PLC by serial cable through ei ther a peripheral port or RS 232C port b Connect the personal computer to the PLC by Ethernet When Ethernet Unit is registe
155. e i e host name Program Default IP Address IP Address Set the IP address for the SMTP server used for sending mail This setting is enabled only when IP address is selected as the method for specifying the server 0 0 0 0 Host name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SMTP server that is to be used for send ing mail This setting is enabled only when host name is selected as the method for specifying the server Port No Set the port to be used for connecting to the SMTP server that is to be used for sending mail This setting does not normally need to be changed 0 No 25 is used Local mail address Set the mail address for the Ethernet Unit None Use POP before SMTP Select whether or not to use the mail receiving method POP before SMTP in which the POP server must be accessed to receive mail before the SMTP server is accessed to send mail Not checked For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 67 POP Section 3 5 3 5 POP Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 27 xi File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP MailAddress Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adius 4 gt POP Post Office Protocol Server Setup Server specification type i C Host Name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Host name ee Port No 00 defaut 110 Account Name Not se
156. e second and day of the week CLOCK WRITE Changes the present year month date minute second or day of the week Message display MESSAGE READ CLEAR Reads and clears messages and reads FAL FALS messages Access rights ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right that has been acquired Error log 140 ERROR CLEAR Clears errors or error messages ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR Clears the error log pointer Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Usage Command Name Function code MR SR File memory 22 01 FILE NAME READ Reads file memory data 22 02 SINGLE FILE READ Reads a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file 22 03 SINGLE FILE WRITE Writes a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file 22 04 FILE MEMORY FORMAT Formats initializes the file memory 22 05 FILE DELETE Deletes specified files stored in the file memory 22 07 FILE COPY Copies files from one file memory to another file memory in the same sys tem 22 08 FILE NAME CHANGE Changes a file name 22 0A MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data bet
157. e so they should al ways be handled by the network administrator 3 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing 4 When using the Internet depending on the condition of the network it may not be possible to acquire the clock information 1 5 7 Specifying Servers by Host Name POP servers SMTP servers and SNTP servers can be specified by host name rather than by IP address by using of the DNS client function DNS server Ethernet nl Cs Cu series LIZ SiS CPU Unit Ethernet Unit Note A DNS server is required to specify servers by host name 22 Nomenclature and Functions Section 1 6 1 6 Nomenclature and Functions This section describes Ethernet Unit component names settings and LED indicators 1 6 1 Component Names CS series Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 100Base TX Front l I ETN21 cS Indicators 100M RI Display the operating status of the Unit Unit Number Switch Used to set the Ethernet Unit s unit number in one digit hexadecimal Node Address Switches Used to set the Ethernet Unit s FINS node number in two digits hexadecimal 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet Connector Used to connect the Ethernet twisted pair cable Each communications device connected to the Ethernet network is allocated a unique Ethernet address For the Ethernet Unit this Ethernet address is shown on the right side of the Unit as a 12 digit hexadecimal number
158. e CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit that didn t work Is the same node number used by another Unit Is the same unit number used by another CPU Bus Unit ERH indicator not lit x Set the unit numbers correctly Y p Restart the CPU Unit If the error persists replace the CPU Unit Has a CPU Unit error Qccurred in the CPU Unit N Correct the IP address in the System Setup and read out the Y controller status using the READ CONTROLLER STATUS command in FINS communications and correct any problems indicated ERH indicator not flashing Make sure that the node number and the last byte of the IP address are the same and set other host IDs to 0 or change the address conversion method to use and IP address table or combined methods Go to Network Connection Problems 209 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 FINS Communications Problems occurred Refer to 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes and remove any causes of the problem discovered there before proceeding with this procedure s the control data for the instruction set incorrectly y Make sure that the FINS network address is not set to 0 for the Ethernet Unit and check the network address node number and unit address Is a CMND 194 instruction being addressed to the local node e g for socket serv
159. e ICMP echo request and reply functions If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command then the nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are cor rect PLC Remote Node host computer or Ethernet Unit TCP UDP 3 2 z ICMP IP i f Ethernet 1 Echo request Echo response The Ethernet Unit automatically returns the echo response packet in response to an echo request packet sent by another node host computer or other Ethernet Unit An echo request packet can be sent to another node by issuing the FINS command to execute the PING command from the PLC Refer to page 181 for details on the PING command Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 2 11 3 Host Computer Method Note Application Examples Normal Execution Abnormal Execution The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an echo request packet to an Ethernet Unit The method for using the PING com mand from a UNIX computer is given next Input the following at the host computer prompt ping IP_address host_name The destination is specified by its IP address or host name If the host name is used the host name must be defined in file etc hosts The PING command is not supported by some host computers These examples show sending the PING command to the node at IP address 130 25 36 8 The in th
160. e as follows Unit Board EMS EMI CS1W ETN21 EN61000 6 2 EN61000 6 4 CJ1W ETN21 Radiated emission 10 m regulations XXV Conformance to EC Directives 6 Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC and 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC EN61131 2 xxvi SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration This section introduces the features describes the system configuration and Unit parts and provides Unit specifications 1 1 Ethernet Unit Function Guide 0 00 0 eee eee eee 2 1 1 1 Overall System Configuration Example 2 1 1 2 Determining the Objectives 0 00 00 0000 2 1 2 Features cst vibe ese toa eee wid Ses Oba tae ea Reames 8 1 3 System Configuration 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 11 1 3 1 System Configuration 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 11 1 3 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 11 1 3 3 Setup Area and Related Peripheral Devices 11 1 4 Specifications sic os Sh oe es Sea eA jk 13 1 4 1 General Specifications 0 0 0 eee ee eee 13 124 2 Dimensions ehy F5 amp eon HE e Duc E o Pun g ROBO n EN 15 1 4 3 Software Configuration 0 0 eee eee eee 16 1 5 Overview of Communications Functions 2 00000005 17 1 5 1 FINS Communications Service 000000000 17 1 5 2 So
161. e example represents the host computer prompt User inputs are underlined Comments are placed after semicolons S ping 130 25 36 8 Executes PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms Enter Ctrl C Key to cancel 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss round trip ms min avg max 0 1 16 S ping 130 25 36 8 Executes PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes Enter Ctrl C Key to cancel 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 0 packets received 100 packets loss Refer to operating system documentation for your host computer for details about using the host computer s PING command 2 12 Converting from Previous Models The specifications for these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 are compatible with those for previous models CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 so previous models being used with existing equipment can be easily replaced by the new models Many of the specifications for the new Ethernet Units have been expanded however so there will be a number of limitations if the Unit is simply replaced In particular the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area is formatted for the previ ous models so there is no way to make the settings for the expande
162. e following errors occur during SNTP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when SNTP server operation is normal SMTP server error ON when the following errors occur during SMTP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server e The verification time from the server has expired when POP before SMTP is set OFF when SMTP server operation is normal POP server error ON when the following errors occur during POP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set A server verification error user name or password occurs e A timeout occurs during communications with the server ON when use of the POP server is normal Address disagreement ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic genera tion but the local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree OFF under all other circumstances EEPROM error ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal Socket Service Request When a socket service request is executed by control bit manipulation it is the Switches 1 to 8 CPU Unit following bits that are manipulated For details refer to Operation Manual to Ethernet Unit Construction of Applications SECTION 6 1514 1812 11108 7 6 5 4 3
163. e of the first short buffer was smaller than the minimum size 28 of the IP header and UDP header when the packet was stored 2 The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the UDP header 3 The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP header was shorter than the UDP overall length in the UDP header All the above values are set to 0 if network operation stops due to incorrect settings in the system setup Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value The maximum values are as follows IP ICMP or UDP status 7FFFFFFF 2 147 483 647 decimal TC status FFFFFFFF 4 294 967 295 decimal Response code Description Normal Command too large 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ Command Block Response Block Reads the status of the Ethernet Units network memory The network mem ory contains 248K bytes that are used as required as for communications buffers for communications servicing The network memory consists of 1 472 short buffers 128 bytes each and 64 long buffers 1 024 bytes each Refer to Appendix B Buffer Configuration Command code Command Response Memory status code code 193 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Memory Status A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order Each Response item consists of 4 bytes 1 2 3 1 Short Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes a b
164. e resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival confirmations when transferring data via socket services including FTP server and mail transfer TCP sockets If the timer setting is exceeded before arrival confirmation is received data is resent Resends are per formed from the first timeout 1 s through the 12th timeout 64 s An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout Continue timer Initial value 5s Maximum value 60s The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send data but the send window is too small either 0 or too small to send the data and the remote node has not requested that communications be restarted Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote node when the continue timer times out The initial value of the timer is 5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas ingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached 2MSL timer 60s The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status IP reassemble timer 12s A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 12 seconds ARP timer 20 min 3 min If a complete ARP table entry with an Ethernet address is not referred to for 20 minutes it is removed from the table An incomplete ARP table entry no response yet returned to the ARP request is removed from the
165. e saved to EEPROM is 64 for the CS Series and 32 for the CJ Series The errors recorded in EEPROM will be saved even if the Unit is restarted or power is turned OFF When the Ethernet Unit is started the contents of the error log in EEPROM is copied to RAM When a FINS command is used to read the error log the log held in RAM is read When a FINS command is used to clear the error log the logs held in both RAM and EEPROM are cleared The following FINS commands can be used to read or clear the error log Refer to SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units Function Command code ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR Error Log Error Codes The error codes are described in the following table The detailed error code will provide detailed information on an error Detailed error code Correction 1st byte 2nd byte Replace the CPU Unit Saved CPU Unit service monitor error Monitor time ms Check the operating environment Saved Other CPU error Bit 11 Unit not in Registered Create the I O tables Saved O Tables Other bits are reserved for system use CPU Unit initialization error 00 00 Replace the CPU Unit Saved Insufficient System Setup Area 00 00 Reduce the number of CPU Bus Saved Units Event timed out MRC SRC Replace the CPU Unit Saved CPU Unit memory error 01 Read Saved error 02 Write error 03 Routing table 04 Setup error 0
166. e to an incorrect checksum The number of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller than the minimum size for a TCP header or was larger than the IP packet The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header could not be stored in the first short buffer The number of resent packets received The number of bytes in the resend packets The number of duplicated resend packets received The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received The number of out of range data packets received Always 0 The number of bytes in the out of range data packets received Always 0 The number of packets where the data was larger than the window The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the win dow The number of packets received after closing The number of window probe packets received The number of resent ACK packets received Command Response Reference Section 7 3 UDP Status Response 1 2 3 Precautions Response Codes 18 The number of ACK packets received with no data set 19 The number of ACK packets received 20 The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowl edgements ACK 21 The number of window advertisement packets received Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 The number of packets discarded because the siz
167. e to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof xviii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditio
168. ead error log reception buffer full 223 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Section 8 5 Main code 03 Communi cations con troller error Sub code 01 Communica tions controller error Check point ERC indicator on the Controller Probable cause Error occurred in the communi cations controller ERC indica tor is lit Remedy Take corrective action referring to troubleshooting procedures in this section 02 CPU Unit error Remote CPU Unit indicators CPU Unit error occurred in the PLC at the remote node Check CPU Unit indicators at the remote node and clear the error in the CPU Unit refer to the PC s operation manuals 04 Unit number setting error Unit number Unit number setting error Make sure the unit number is within the specified range and that the same unit number is not used twice in the same network 04 Not exe cutable Service not supported 01 Unsupported command Command code An undefined command has been used Check the command code and be sure the command is sup ported by the Unit to which you are sending it FINS header frame length A short frame 4 bytes is being used for the FINS header frame Check the FINS header frame length The Ethernet Unit does not support short headers 05 Routing error 01 Routing table setting error Routing tables Remote node is not set in the routing tables S
169. ecifies the TCP port number for the local node Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal 183 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Remote TCP Port Number Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node Response TCP Transitions Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers Response For details on TCP status changes refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transi tions Number Status Meaning 00000000 CLOSED Connection closed 00000001 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00000002 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00000003 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00000004 ESTABLISHED Already established 00000005 CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion 00000006 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00000007 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00000008 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK 00000009 FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN 0000000A TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum seg ment life 2MSL Response Codes Response code Description Normal Node address setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 7 3 21 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE Writes the IP address table Command Block Command Number IP address IP address code of record
170. ecimal to the Ethernet Unit Procedure for Using FINS TCP Is Note Make the basic settings Refer to Section 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Net works L Make the settings in the Unit Setup With the CX Programmer connected online select the Ethernet Unit in the CX Program mer s I O Table Window Right click and select Unit Setup Then make the following set tings in the Unit Setup Window Setup Tab e FINS TCP port Default 9600 FINS TCP Tab e Remote IP addresses when client Note When functioning as a server set the permitted client IP addresses only when protection is in effect e Automatically allocated FINS node addresses Note The functions of these items are described in detail in the Operation Manual Con struction of Applications SECTION 7 Using FINS Communications to Create Host Applications Normally the defaults should be used e Keep alive setting Note Normally this should be selected to be used IP addresses protection setting Note Check this only for protection as the server L Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC L Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote
171. ecords that can be stored in the IP router table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0008 8 records The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is exe cuted is returned in hexadecimal The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP router table records is calculated as the number of records x 8 bytes record The configuration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below 1 8 bytes Lit IP Network address Router IP address Network ID IP Network Address The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal The network ID part cor responding to the address class determined by the leftmost 3 bits set here is enabled Refer to page 49 Router IP Address The IP address in hexadecimal of a router connected to a network specified with IP addresses If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP router table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally Response code Description Normal Command too large Command too small Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 25 PROTOCOL STATUS READ Reads the Ethernet Unit protocol status 27 62 Command code Command Block Response Block Command Response IP status IC
172. ected to the Ethernet network the Ethernet Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches NODE NO to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network NODE p my x16 Setting range Y 4g0 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When using the automatic generation method either dynamic or passive for address conversion set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ether net Unit to the same value as the node address If this is not possible either the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communi cations If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the ERC indicator will light If the node address is set to 00 the Unit operating mode change function will start This function changes the format for the Unit Setup in the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area when converting to a CS1W ETN21 or CU1
173. ection 3 1 3 1 Setup Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit z i 2 x File Options Help Broadcast Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP Bri Ce C All0 2BSD FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port Default 9600 Default 600 C User defined C User defined 0 0 IP Address Conversion Baud Rate TOP IP keep alive 0 0 0 0 Auto dynamic Auto 0 min 0 default 20 C Auto Static C 10BASE T Sub net Mask C Mixed r Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 C Table used IV Change Dynamically FTP IP Address Table IP Router Table Login Password m s Port No j E pet D default 20 C51G CJ1G OPU45 Program Contents Set the method for specifying IP addresses for broadcasting in FINS UDP All 1 4 3BSD Broadcast with host number set to all ones All 0 4 2BSD Broadcast with host number set to all zeros Normally the default setting should be used Default All 1 4 3BSD IP Address Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Unit 0 0 0 0 FINS node address 192 168 250 Sub net Mask Set the subnet mask for the Ethernet Unit This is required if a method other than the IP address table method is used for address conversion 0 0 0 0 default net mask for IP address set ting FINS UDP Port Specify the local UDP port number to be used for the FINS communica tions service
174. ed within 12 seconds after being received 10 Always 0 11 The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been dis carded 12 Always 0 Note Refer to 7 3 26 MEMORY STATUS READ for details on the short buffer 189 Command Response Reference ICMP Status Response 190 1 2 3 Section 7 3 Ten types 46 items of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexa decimal value 1 10 The number of times the ICMP error routine was called The ICMP error routine uses ICMP packets to inform the source about errors The routine is called when an illegal packet is received error in IP option processing or error in relay processing or if the object port does not exist when using UDP Always 0 Always 0 Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are de fined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Only 0 3 14 16 and 18 are counted by the Ethernet Unit Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information request reply Address mask request Address mask reply The number of receive
175. ee eee tees 227 TABLE OF CONTENTS Appendices A Ethernet Network Parameters 0 cece eee eee eee eben eee e eee eeee 231 B Butter Contisuration sanas yee Cae aah eh ne eel Seah wee tee eae 233 TCP Stats Tran sitions sienien Sees ae oh Sg ale ae eed A Oe FIN alee ele eS 235 De ASOT Characters fec6 04 cose a Wath a tong a A bea ce Bae hh ted ce a AERAR 237 E lt Maintenances araoe eee he on Me ee al ce Wee Rites a ei hoes one barons AS 239 E InSpecttOns is 5h5 ce5 een E EER an wens Ah Sane wR AN oe a we AeA 241 G Ethernet Unit Web Function 0 0 eect tenet nent n eens 243 INGER 655 3 adosee bate soothe eee fac eee esaweue 249 Revision History oss siecle cae esa esseacae 257 TABLE OF CONTENTS About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units 100Base TX and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the Ethernet Unit Be sure to read the precautions provided in the fol lowing section Section 1 introduces the features describes the system configuration and Unit parts and provides Unit specifications Section 2 explains how to install the Ethernet Unit and make the initial settings required for operation Section 3 provides information for setting communications using CX Programmer Section 4 describes the words
176. een Page 59 Added item to table and notes Page 60 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 in table Page 71 Added information on HTTP Server Setup and changed screen Page 84 Changed 07CD hex to O7CO hex Page 85 Corrected 00 00 00 00 to 0 0 0 0 and corrected information for setting local IP address Page 96 Added information on prohibiting dynamic conversion of remote IP addresses Pages 100 and 101 Corrected table headings Page 124 Added note Page 125 Corrected Controller Unit to Controller Link Unit in diagram Page 126 Corrected Ethernet Unit to Controller Link Unit in information on relay network tables and corrected 2 to 1 for the relay node address Pages 141 and 142 Changed PC to PLC Page 197 Removed CJ Series only from table Page 221 Added error codes to table Page 229 Added table on TCP status information 257 Revision History Revision code Date Revised content 03 June 2005 Information was added for new versions of the Ethernet Unit and minor corrections were also made including the following changes Page v Added information on general precautions notation Page vii Removed table Page xiii Added information on warranty and liability Page 28 Added table Page 36 Changed cable in diagram Pages 45 and 247 Replaced diagram Pages 85 and 120 Changed n 24 to n 23 Page 1
177. eginning word D at the local node Local node Remote node number N 15 0 15 0 r sA Number m of words m RECV 98 S S Remote node beginning word D D Local beginning word C C First word of control data below 15 l l 0 15 10 87 3 0 c o 3 o 0 Number of reception words m L Number of retries um 0 to F Hex 0 to 15 retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words Communications a Haben 0to7 15 187 0 cal 0 0 f Response Destination network number 9 peauren d Not required 00 Hex Local network q 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 11 87 0 I L g nati Response monitor time N cnt 0000 Fiex 2s 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board in units of 0 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Remote node number M send source 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services itis common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries
178. egrator is software that comes with the CX One and is automatically installed when the CX One is installed Each time the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted it reads and uses the contents of the Routing Table Area as the settings for FINS network Personal computer running Windows CX Integrator Routing table settings Ethernet Unit alg Se E Lal outing Tab ee CS CJ series CPU Unit FinsGateway can be used as middleware when constructing communications applications on a personal computer for a FINS network using Visual C or Visual BASIC The CX Programmer and CX Integrator can also be connected online through FinsGateway When FINS UDP is used in the FINS communi cations service all versions of FinsGateway can be used When FINS TCP is used in the FINS communications service only FinsGate way Version 2003 or higher can be used When the CX Programmer and CX Integrator are connected online by FINS TCP FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher must be used For CX Programmer Ver 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly con nect to the PLC online Specifications Section 1 4 Personal computer running Windows User created software CX Programmer FinsGateway Windows CS CJ series CPU Unit 1 4 Specifications 1 4 1 General Specifications CS series Ethernet Unit Specifications Model nu
179. er Private and Global Addresses 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses Communi cations method FINS UDP Method of pairing of IP addresses and FINS node addresses By pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses in Ethernet Product Programmable Terminal Version NS Series Model Series Open Network Controller ONC Section 5 3 Supports combined method No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node addresses and the relation between fixed and variable address for both FINS UDP and FINS TCP IP address determination IP address conversion Automatic gen eration method static Client personal Server PLC computer of PLC FINS node IP address FINS node IP address address address Fixed Fixed Automatic gen eration method dynamic Fixed Fixed or variable IP address table method Fixed Fixed or variable Combined method Fixed Fixed or variable FINS TCP 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 5 3 1 By automatic conver sion of FINS node addresses at Ether net Unit and remote node and then sending and receiv ing data Automatic Connection method auto matic FINS node address conversion Private and Global Addresses Fixed or can be allo F
180. er Local network number 0 1 1 2 e Relay Network Table None Example PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Unit number Local network number ae a e Relay Network Table In order to relay from PLC2 3 to the final network number 1 it is necessary to relay via node address 1 i e the Controller Link Unit on relay network number 2 Final network number Relay network number Relay node address 1 1 Save the routing table file File Save local routing table file Select New from the Project Menu and save with a file name Then select Add Device from the Project Menu For each PLC register a PLC with a direct serial connection node address 0 and select it 4 With CX Integrator select Open from the PLC Menu 5 Select Routing table Setup read the saved file and select Options Transfer to PLC Click Yes to transfer the routing tables to the connected PLCs oN 6 5 2 FinsGateway FinsGateway Ver 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS TCP between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units FinsGateway Ver 3 L or lower versions can be used however when commu nicating by the FINS UDP method only m Overview of Setup Methods 1 Starting FinsGateway Settings Select FinsGateway FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup 2 ETN_UNIT Driver Setup 1 Double click on ETN_UNIT in the settings
181. eration mode change function Set the node address correctly is in effect 8 2 Error Status The Ethernet Unit will output error status to the following word in the CIO Area of the CPU Unit This information can be used in troubleshooting errors Word CIO 1500 25 x unit number 18 Error Status Ethernet Unit The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the to CPU Unit following diagram 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 nie oe TIT AHR Bit 02 IP address setting error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error 14 13 12 11 10 Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error Status Manipulated by Unit operation Not used IP address setting error ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP address All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1 All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1 All bits in the subnet ID are 1 e The IP address begins with 127 0x7F OFF when the IP address is normal IP address table error On if the IP address table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal IP router table error ON if the IP router table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal 201 Error Log Section 8 3 Bit Error Stat
182. ervices 96 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables 98 5 2 3 Application Examples 0 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee 104 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods 105 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses 107 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 107 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses 000000000 107 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit 109 5 3 3 Ethernet Unit with a Global Address 0 0 111 93 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 IP Addresses Ethernet networks use IP addresses for communications IP addresses iden tify both the Ethernet network and the node host computer Ethernet Unit etc IP addresses must be set and controlled so that they are not duplicated 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8 bit fields called octets These four octets provide the network number net ID and host number host ID The network number identifies the network and the host number identifies the node or host on the network The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes A B and C so that the address system can be selected according to the scale of the network Classes D and E are not used The configuration of the IP address for each of these classes is shown in the following
183. es val set here For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Man ual Construction of Applications 68 Mail Address Section 3 6 3 6 Mail Address Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 12 xi File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP PoP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjus gt Destination Mail Address Setup Mail address 1 Mail address 2 CS1G CJ1G CPU45 Program Destination Mail Address Setup Item Contents Default Mail Address 1 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit is to send mail Up to two address can be set Note Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by punctuating the mail address with commas Mail Address 2 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit is to send mail Up to two address can be set Note Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by punctuating the mail address with commas For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 69 Send Mail Section 3 7 3 7 Send Mail Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit fe Sottivere Pe Word value cretrge i c Pe Bit valle change ja mitomanio ameno aata E a A Fedra Deh ees 8 El condition et eran storage FS caters Edara GRU condition FAL occurence m Penadic tinier E E ss Trigger No Select a number as the trigger condition f
184. es set to be fixed only An automatic client FINS node address allocation function now makes it possible to connect online to the PLC even if no FINS node address has been set for the host computer Previously online connection to the PLC was possible only after a FINS node address was set for the host computer FINS message communications are now enabled in TCP IP with up to 16 simultaneous connections so a system can now utilize FINS message communications in both UDP IP and TCP IP Previously only UDP IP could be used Multiple FINS applications such as the CX Programmer on the same computer can now be connected online to the PLC via Ethernet in either TCP IP or UDP IP Previously when one FINS application on a computer was connected online to the PLC it was impossible to connect any other at the same time Transferring Data Files between Host Computers FTP Server Function A built in FTP server function enables data files in the PLC to be read from a workstation or computer with an FTP client function and for data to be written to the PLC Large amounts of data can be transferred at a time from clients without requiring ladder programming Additional E mail Functions Mail Receive Function Receiving Commands for the PLC by E mail E mail File Attachment Function With previous Ethernet Unit models CS1W ETN01 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 e mail could sent only from the Ethernet Unit and the data tha
185. et mask Uses value corresponding to IP address class Broadcast settings 4 3BSD specifications Baud rate Auto TCP IP keep alive 120 minutes IP router table Not set IP routing not supported E Subnet Mask For the subnet mask all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used as either the net number or the subnet number are set to 1 and the bits corre sponding to the host number are set to 0 These settings must be made when using an address conversion method other than the IP address table method If no subnet mask is set or if an illegal value is set the following values will be used depending on the IP address class Class Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 With the default setting 0 0 0 0 a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address class is used E Broadcast Settings Set the method for specifying IP addresses when broadcasting Broadcast with all ones for Host ID 4 3BSD specifications All 1 4 3BSD Default All 0 4 2BSD Broadcast with Host ID all zeros 4 2BSD specifications 48 Basic Settings Section 2 9 E Baud Rate Set the baud rate Auto Default Automatically detects the baud rate between hubs Operates with 100Base TX full duplex whenever possible 10Base T Operates with 10Base T half duplex E TCP IP Keep alive Setting Set the Liveness Checking Interval This setting is enabled only when
186. et the destination address in the routing tables 02 Routing tables not regis tered Routing tables Routing tables aren t registered completely Set routing tables at the local node remote node and any relay nodes 03 Routing table error Routing tables Routing table error Set the routing tables correctly 04 Too many relays Network configu ration The maximum number of relay nodes 2 was exceeded in the command Redesign the network or recon sider the routing table to reduce the number of relay nodes in the command Communications are possible on three network levels including the local network 10 Com mand format error 224 01 Command too long Command data The command is longer than the max permissible length Check the command format of the command and set it correctly Be sure broadcast transmissions don t exceed 1 473 bytes 02 Command too short Command data The command is shorter than min permissible length Check the command format of the command and set it correctly 03 Element data mismatch Command data The designated number of data items differs from the actual number in the command data Check the number of items and the data and make sure that they agree 05 Header parameter error Command data Data for another node on the same network was received from the network An attempt was made to sen
187. ets 1 to 8 Opening Flag Receiving Flag Sending Flag Closing Flag Results Storage Error Flag Socket Open Flag e Service status FTP status e FINS TCP Connection Status For explanations of how to use the related communications services listed in the above diagram refer to the indicated sections CIO Area Allocations Unit Control Bits CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit 15 Switch Not used 14 13 12 11 10 Status Manipulated by Socket Force close Switch Mail Send Switch Unit operation Section 4 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch Reference Socket Force close Switch All sockets are forcibly closed when this bit turns ON Turned OFF by Unit after sockets are closed Operation Manual Con struction of Applica tions SECTION 6 Mail Send Switch User mail is sent when this bit turns ON Turned OFF by Unit after user mail has been sent Operation Manual Con struction of Applica tions SECTION 2 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch The automatic clock adjustment is executed when this bit turns ON Operation Manual Con struction of Applica tions SECTION 5 Turned OFF by Unit after automatic clock adjustment has been com pleted Not used m Socket Force close Switch Bit 2 All UDP and TCP sockets used for socket services can be force closed by turning ON this switch This can be used for operations such as err
188. ettings reading from Unit 160 modulation method CJ series 14 CS series 13 mounting Racks 33 MRES 157 N Network Tab 126 131 networks network memory 193 234 No field 64 node addresses manipulating rotary switches 58 setting 31 32 Node Number Switches 23 noise xxiii Contact Output Units 37 O OBJ extension 73 online editing xxii Opening Flag 80 operating environment ambient humidity CJ series 14 CS series 14 ambient temperature CJ series 14 CS series 14 precautions xxiii Index P PARAMBackup command 6 73 Password field 63 PCMR 260 instruction 142 PING 10 52 181 application examples 53 echo test 52 POP server 22 POP Tab 51 68 POP3 communications 17 POP3 server 6 Port No field 63 66 68 74 port numbers UDP port reading from Unit 160 power supply xxiii precautions xxiv precautions xxi applications xxiii Contact Output Units 37 general xxii inspections 241 installation 33 34 operating environment xxiii power supply xxiv replacing Units 239 safety xxii wiring 38 Programming Console 40 Programming Devices connecting 39 CX Net 40 CX Programmer 40 Programming Console 40 Protect using mail address field 72 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 189 protocols 16 ARP 16 DNS 17 FINS 17 FTP 17 ICMP 16 IP 16 POP3 17 reading status 189 SMTP 17 SNTP 17 TCP 17 253 TCP IP 8 UDP 17 UDPI IP 8 R Racks moun
189. ewall 1444444444244411 TTM a i Server Room Nah Office Floor i 7 Oe 1 i r Li Da i 1 G DNS server i FTP software a CX Programmer Iaa Independent user l ra POP3 server Mail software l SCADA software Q application SMPT server it od PLC Reporter Compolet D gt SNPT server ma lt FinsGateway lt i pal FTP communications driver UDP TCP socket l pi i i Ethernet S Large files Ethernet 4 i E E C i i 1 EAE Router i 4 Receiving mail data files at Factory line CX Programmer PLCs i Receiving mail Loe ma NS series PT el lll ae lll lle leone se 1 Writing i i N FINS FINS commands Ethernet 1 i 1 4 O Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit 3 i 1 Connecting the CX Programmer to Sending mail 1 PLCs online via Ethernet y fot So O FINS message 3 Capturing PLC changes EEG qi T ys communications and sending the status of P gt weil i equipment to an operator a cl FINS message Memory Card communications 7 Automatically adjusting the PLC s internal clock iodi FIN periodically 2 Sending and receiving data via Ethernet S between OMRON PLCs 1 1 2 Determining the Objectives Connecting the CX Programmer to PLCs Online via Ethernet Connecting within the Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS Same Segment UDP FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON p
190. f the problem persists replace the CPU Unit The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Lit There is a mistake in the settings for a Read the error status and history server DNS SMTP POP3 or SNTP in and correct the data that is causing the Unit Setup the error If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Not lit Lit An error occurred in communications with Inspect the communications path the server Ethernet Unit cable connections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error Lit Lit An error occurred in EEPROM Restart the PLC If the problem per sists replace the Ethernet Unit 200 Error Status Section 8 2 RUN ERC ERH LNK HOST Probably cause Correction The IP address is set incorrectly Correct the IP address Do not set any of the following IP addresses e Host IDs that are all 0 or all 1 e Network IDs that are all O or all 1 e Subnetwork IDs that are all 1 e Addresses beginning with 127 7F Hex The node address set on the rotary Make sure that the node address switch on the front of the Unit does not and the last byte of the IP address agree with the host ID in the IP address are the same and set other host IDs This probably can occur when the to 0 address conversion method is set for Change the address conversion automatic address generation method The Unit op
191. faut 600 3 c araser aous e e a Select HTTP from the menu to display the HTTP setting items The following window shows the default settings OMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Internet Explorer E http 192 168 250 1 0 247 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 6 Make the required settings i e the password in this example To prevent incorrect password entry set the same password in the WEB Password field and WEB Password Confirm field HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Server Setup Parameter Value WEB Password WEB Password Confirm Port No lo 0 default 80 Option M Use WEB Function Cancel Regist Reload 7 After entering the correct password click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button puri p Set Cancel Regist Reload The Set Button is used to transfer the entered values from the personal computer and temporarily register them in the Ethernet Unit The Regist Button stores the set values that have been temporarily registered in the Ethernet to the flash mem ory non volatile memory of the CPU Unit The Ethernet Unit reads the unit settings from flash memory non volatile memory when the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted Therefore when making the unit set tings using the Web function always click the Set Button before the Regist Button Otherwise the entered set values will not be used The Set Button and Regist Butt
192. flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area as shown in the following table Flag name Address Contents Bits Communications Port Port 7 OFF Execution enabled Enabled Flag Port 6 being executed Port 5 ON Execution disabled Port 4 not being executed Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Communications Port Port 7 0 Normal completion Error Flag Port 6 1 Abnormal completion Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Note With CS CJ series PLCs communications ports 0 to 7 are also used for exe cuting the PCMR 260 PROTOCOL MACRO instruction so these flags are used in common for SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 and PCMR 260 While PCMR 260 is being executed SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 cannot be executed at the same communications port 142 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Communications Port The status of a SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruction after Completion Codes execution is reflected as a communications port completion code in one word two bytes of data as shown in the following table The value is 0000 during instruction execution The recorded status is saved until execution of the next instruction Word Contents Communications Port 0 Completion Code Communications Port 1 Completion Code Communications Port 2 Completion Code Communications Port 3 Completion Code Communications Port 4 Completion Code Communications Port 5 Completion Code Communications P
193. for the network and Unit The fol lowing ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed 130 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 e Network Tab ETN_UNIT Properties e Network number Set the network number for the personal computer Ethernet port e Local node address Set the personal computer Ethernet port node address 1 to 254 on the Ethernet network e Communication unit number Set the unit number in decimal 16 to 31 for the per sonal computer Ethernet port Communication Unit Tab ETN_UNIT Properties 3Com 3C90x Ethernet Adapter Jo Heke own node adress from Paddress Epp e UDP port number Set the local UDP port number for the personal com puter Ethernet port The default is 9600 e Priority Network Card If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal computer select the Network Card that is to be given priority e FINS IP address conver Set the IP address conversion method sion 131 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 e UDP Nodes Tab Automatic Generation Method Dynamic or Passive ETN_UNIT Properties USErcetined ETN_UNIT Properties Userdennmedi Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box 132 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 Ethernet Node Definition USer cenned PRE Hanes Hise setting Ee port noniger Keepalre H e Node address Set the remote FINS node
194. from the Ethernet Unit to speci fied e mail addresses when a pre specified PLC condition is met User cre ated data in ASCII error log data and status data in the CPU Unit can all be sent as text E mail can be sent over the Internet and not just within the intranet SMTP server Ethernet E Ethernet Unit CS CJ series EMA CPU Unit The e mail can be sent on any of the following types of timing When the Mail Send Switch turns ON When the value of a specified word meets a condition When the value of a specified bit meets a condition When an error is recorded in the Ethernet Unit s error log When the CPU Unit s operating mode is changed At regular intervals 1 Depending on the Internet service provider ISP the use of POP before SMTP may be defined from the standpoint of security considerations This Unit handles POP before SMTP Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 2 An SMTP server is required to use the mail send function 3 Mail server settings require specialized knowledge so they should al ways be handled by the network administrator 4 Be sure that you have a clear understanding of the mail system before us ing this function 5 Mail my not always be delivered Depending on factors such as the con dition of the network mail that has been sent may not arrive at its desti nation 1 5 5 Mail Receive Function With the mail receive function the user writes a command into the
195. g j ae the FINS command READ l SOCKET STATUS Is there the maximum number of bytes in the send queue 4 096 bytes Y Make sure that reception processing is being performed at the remote node Return to the procedure for general problems 216 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 5 FTP Service Problems Connection Problems Connection problem occurred Are you unable to connect to the Ethernet Unit s FTP server Y The FTP server is connected to another client Wait until the client has finished Is the FTP indicator lit Are the parameter settings in the host omputer incorrect Y Correct the computer settings Refer to the documentation for your computer Go to Network Connection Problems N Check the login name and password settings Are you unable to g p 9 log in Memory Card What type of Memory Card is it EM File Memory Convert to EM File Memory in the PLC System Setup Have specified banks of the EM Area been converted to EM File Memory Can you display the EM directory using Is from the host computer N Initialize the EM File Memory from the CX Programmer or other Programming Device Has the EM File Memory been initialized Can you display the MEMCARD directory using Is from the host computer Is a Memory Card not inserted in the PLC N Insert a Memory C
196. g address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connection method FINS UDP With the IP address table method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not changed dynamically For all others node the data from FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be dynami cally changed when the Unit is turned ON or restarted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table FINS node number IP address Node number in 1 153 214 0 62 IP address table 2 53 0 6 20 153 214 0 129 P address 153 214 0 129 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent When FINS Command is Received FINS node number Changed i i FINS response returned The combined method combines the IP address table method and the auto matic generation method dynamic First the IP address table is referenced Then if the applicable FINS node address is found the corresponding IP address is read If the FINS node address is not found the IP address is calculated using the automatic genera tion method dynamic The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Addres
197. ge Units in the CS CJ Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the products for which unit versions are being managed as shown below Product nameplate omron cs1w 00 OO UNIT OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Unit version on for unit version 1 3 Lot No 0404010000 Ger 13 CX Programmer version 4 0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the Unit Manufacturing Information The unit versions of Pre Ver 2 0 Units cannot be confirmed Unit Manufac turing Information The following dialog box is displayed PLC I0 Table x A Failed to read Manufacturing Information For this Unit Location In the O Table Window right click and select Unit Manufacturing informa tion CPU Unit The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed Unit Manufacturing Information 2 x File Help Manufacturing Details Revision Number eE PCB Revision Number s Software Revision Number Ba fo Lot Number ao Manufacturing ID a Serial Number fs Unit Version Number fie lt lt Unit Text CIM CPU23 Run Unit version Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the Unit connected online Using Unit Version Label The following unit version label is provided with the Ethernet Unit This label can be attached to the front of the Ethernet U
198. gs at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Processing time considerations Normal Mode 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice peripheral servicing execution given priority time Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access 1 ms max For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Note The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than those calculated with the methods given here Among the causes of longer delays are the following traffic on the network window sizes at network Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section 6 7 nodes traffic through the Ethernet Unit e g socket servicing FTP server communications etc and the system configuration Example Calculations The following example shows calculations for receiving 256 words between two PLC nodes using RECV 098 Calculations are shown in the following table Conditions Local node CPU cycle time 10 ms Local node CPU processing mode Normal Local node CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Remote node CPU cycle time 15 ms Remote node CPU processing mode Normal Remote n
199. h as possible implement communications traffic testing up to the point of actual system operation If any problem occurs adjust the traffic 5 If acommercially available protocol analyzer can be used then the actual FINS frame processing time i e the time from when a command is re ceived at the Ethernet Unit until a response is sent can be measured un der high traffic conditions and the communications traffic can be further adjusted as required SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units This section describes the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that are returned by the Ethernet Unit 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 0 0000 e eee eee ee 156 7 1 1 Command Code List s s rerea iraa paad e eee ee eee 156 7 1 2 Response Code List 00 0 0c OE DERA OARRA 156 7 2 Socket Applications sisse ari E EAE RIRE REIER ee ee eerie 157 T 2 Format trpe taeae pta n hacia tae the hese Ah Ge tad 157 7 2 2 PLC Memory Areas 0 2 ee ee eee 158 7 3 Command Response Reference 0 0 0 cece eee 159 TIl RESET geod a e gai a oie wearer BLY tye ah ala Be 159 7 3 2 CONTROLLER DATA READ 0 000000 160 7 3 3 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 0 0 161 7 3 4 INTERNODE ECHO TEST 000000 163 7 3 5 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 164 7 3 6 BROADCAST DATA SEND 0 0000002 eee 164 7 3
200. has been improved The size of received data accu mulated in the reception buffer is now stored and a Data Received Flag has been added enabling the TCP socket s receive program to be executed after the required data has been accumulated in the Ethernet Unit s reception buffer The keep alive setting has also been enabled for TCP socket services UNIX computer etc node with socket services interface TCP UDP protocol CS Cu series CPU Unit commands TCP protocol responses Results Storage UDP protocol Processing results Socket interface Ethernet Unit CS Cu series CPU Unit 19 Overview of Communications Functions Section 1 5 1 5 3 FTP Server Function The Ethernet Unit has a built in FTP server so other computers on the Ether net can read or write individual files on a Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit or in EM File Memory This allows files to be exchanged between the host computer and the PLC with the host computer functioning as an FTP client and the PLC as an FTP server Host computer FTP client Memory Card or EM File Memory PLC to host computer File data Memory Card or Memory Card or F EM File Memory EM File Memory 1 5 4 Mail Send Function 20 Note This function automatically sends data in the CPU Unit s I O memory or a file on a Memory Card as an e mail attachment
201. he following table along with the results they indicate Refer to 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes for details on response codes including the SRES MRES Execution results Normal completion Local node error Remote node error Unit error controller error Service not supported Routing error Command format error Parameter error Status error Operating environment error Unit error 7 2 Socket Applications The format of the following FINS commands partially differs when the sockets are used Command code SRC UDP OPEN REQUEST UDP RECEIVE REQUEST UDP SEND REQUEST UDP CLOSE REQUEST PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST TCP RECEIVE REQUEST TCP SEND REQUEST TCP CLOSE REQUEST 7 2 1 Format The basic format of these commands is shown in the diagram below 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Number of bytes from eee a Command Results storage area Parameters code Socket number Socket option Command Code Specifies the requested process Socket Option For the TCP OPEN REQUEST ACTIVE or PASSIVE specifies whether or not the keep alive function is to be used For all other commands it is dis abled Set to 0 Socket Number Specifies the socket number for which the process is requested from 1 to 8 Results Storage Area Specifies the area to store the results of the requested process 157 Socket Applications Parame
202. he internal table is changed after connections are established The Ethernet Unit executes the following processing when the FINS TCP method is used Local Device Is FINS TCP Client 1 Connections are established in TCP IP protocol with the IP addresses set at the Unit i e the IP address for each connection No 2 The remote node i e the server is notified of the FINS node address for the local device 3 Notification is received from the remote node i e the server of the re mote node s FINS node address 4 The Ethernet Unit changes the internal table FINS node address IP ad dress and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received Local Device Is a FINS TCP Server 1 A request to open a connection is received in TCP IP protocol from the re mote device i e the client either a personal computer or an Ethernet Unit and the connection is established 2 Notification is received from the remote node i e the client of the remote node s FINS node address 3 The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address 4 The Ethernet Unit changes the internal node correspondence table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Personal computer or Ethernet Unit client Local FINS node number A A y Local IP address T ry
203. heck the unit address at the remote node Troubleshoot the error in the CPU Unit using the PLC operation manual Set the destination address in the routing tables Set the local node remote node and relay nodes in the routing tables Create the routing tables correctly Reconstruct the network or cor rect the routing tables so that commands are sent to within a 3 level network range Check the command format and set the correct command data Check the command format and set the correct command data Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Check for nodes sending illegal packets Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Check the routing tables Set the remote node in the IP address table Select the IP address table or both methods for the address con version method Change the network so that traffic is not concentrated Reduce the size of events 204 Logic error in setting table 01 Data link table 02 Network parameters 03 Routing tables 04 Unit Setup 05 CPU Bus Unit Words CIO DM Recreate the data specified by the 2nd byte of the detailed error code Error Log Section 8 3 Error Meaning Detailed error code Correction EE code PROM Parameter error packet discarded 1st byte Commands Bit 15 Bits 08 to 14 Bits 00 to 07 Responses Bit 15 Bits 08 to 1
204. hen specify the name of the file that is to be sent 71 Receive Mail Section 3 8 Item Interval time When Periodic timer is set as the mail trigger type Contents Set the time interval for sending mail 1 to 1 440 10 to 14 400 min in units of 10 min Default 0 10 minutes When Bit value change or Word value change is set as the mail trig ger type Set the time interval for monitor ing the value at a specified address 1 to 1 000 1 to 1 000 s in units ofis Default 0000 0 1 second For details refer to SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 3 8 Receive Mail Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP MailAddress Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adius 4 gt Ci Mail address m Posting Mail Address Protection Setting M OBJ MV STD M 0M J Custom1 J Custom 2 T Custom 3 m Receive Attached File Setting IV Receive file with specified extension only M cesy M TXT extension extension extension gt Receive Command Setting M Receive specified commands only I FileWrite I ChangeMode IV FileRead MV ErorLogRead Tl FileDelete MV ErorLogClear Iv FileList M MaillogRead IV UMBackup M MailLogClear V PARAMBackup I Test T lOMWwrite J FinsSend M I0MRead Posting Mail Address Protection Setti
205. hen using this method always leave the local IP address in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area set to the default value of 0 0 0 0 If the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area contains any other value any setting made in the allocated DM words will be overwritten with it The CX Integrator is required The CX Programmer is required RUN The local IP address and other parameters can be set with the CX Programmer APLC Programming Device is required CX Programmer CX Integrator Programming Console etc Switch Settings Section 2 2 2 2 Switch Settings 2 2 1 CS series Ethernet Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 Setting range 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs words are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations Setting the Node Address Note Relation to IP Addresses Unit Operating Mode Change Function With the FINS communications service when there are multiple Ethernet Units conn
206. hods If more hub ports are required they can be added by connecting more than one hub There are two possible connection methods for hubs Cascade and stacked Cascade Connections e Connect two hubs to each other as follows Connect an MDI port to an MDI X port with a straight cable connect two MDI ports with a cross cable and connect two MDI X ports with a cross cable Note Itis very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appear ance Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible e With cascade connections up to 5 segments can be connected using up to 4 repeaters i e 4 hubs MDI ports MDI X port Straight cable cross Hub Cross cable Hub Hub Hub Eng ZJ z EE 7 D a oy au on coe Stack Connections e Connect the hubs using special cables or special racks e Normally there is no limit to the number of hubs in a stack and each stack is treated as one hub Some hubs however are limited in the number of hubs per stack cpm Hub Four stackable hubs Two stackable hubs M 7 Stack cable 36 Network Installation Section 2 4 2 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units Communications errors can occur when Contact Output Units are mounted to the same Rack or connected to the same PLC
207. ications Port Error Flags Bits A21900 to A21907 turn ON when an error occurred during execution of a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0 Normal end 1 Error end A30200 to A30215 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units Units 0 through 15 respectively are initializing The bits will turn ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit A50100 to A50115 is turned ON 0 Not initializing 1 Initializing System will automatically turn the flag OFF when ini tialization has been completed A40203 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in the I O tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A427 0 No setting error 1 Setting error A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A40207 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU and CPU Bus Units The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The Unit where the error occurred will stop The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A422 0 N
208. ices Are different UDP port numbers set for FINS communications for both the local node and the Set the same port number for both nodes IP routing must be used if the net ID of the IP address of the local node and remote node Set the IP address of the remote Y node in the local IP address table Note Use of the IP address table must be set in the mode settings for the IP address table to be effective Note The automatic generation setting cannot be used alone Kfe the local and remote nodes both on the same network i e do they have the ame network number in thej IP addresses Is the IP address of the remote node missing from the IP address table Set the network number of the remote node in the IP router table Is the IP address of the remote node missing from the IP router table Set the IP address of the remote node in the IP address table or use automatic address conversion Are the FINS network addresses of the local and emote nodes different Set both nodes to the same FINS network address Do not attempt to broadcast to a node with a different Y p network number You can broadcast only to nodes on the same IP network Are you attempting a broadcast transmission Are the routing tables set improperly Y _ Set routing tables at the local node target node and any relay nodes Are you attempting to communicate with a PLC on anothe
209. ient processing capacity for the volume of FINS mes sages commands that are coming from the network 153 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section 6 7 154 For example suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a sin gle FINS frame i e 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the Ethernet Unit until a response is sent If 100 or more FINS frames com mands are received at once from multiple communicating nodes it will take approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the last command If a time out is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less then a timeout will be gen erated A retry will begin due to the timeout and the traffic to the Ethernet Unit will thus be increased even further until ultimately the responses to all the nodes will be too slow At this point the system is overloaded m Avoiding Errors due to High Traffic To avoid high traffic from FINS communications the communications load must be kept down to a reasonable level To accomplish this follow the proce dure below 1 Specify the node where FINS frames seem to be concentrated 2 Referring to 6 6 6 Transmission Delays estimate the total processing time for all of the FINS frames processed at that node 3 Set the timeout value for all of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1 5 times the total processing time for all of the FINS frames 4 As muc
210. ifications Baud rate Auto TCP IP keep alive 120 minutes IP router table Not set IP routing not supported Unit Setup This method sets the IP address by first selecting the Ethernet Unit from the CX Programmer s I O Table Window while connected online and then setting the IP address from the Unit Setup 47 Basic Settings Section 2 9 Example Using the CX Programmer to Set the IP Address to 10 3 65 1 Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit b 21x File Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP Broadcast FINS UDP Port m FINS TOP Port All1 43BSD Default 9600 Default 9600 C All 2BSD User defined C User defined bp p TEE Baud Rate TCP IP keep alive Auto dynamic Auto 0 min 0 default 20 YO Auto Static C 10BASE T D C Mixed Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 Table used IV Change Dynamically FTP IP Address Table IP Router Table Login Password m Port No ax default 219 When an IP address is set in the Unit Setup that value is displayed in the IP Address Display Setting Area in the DM Area words allocated for CPU Bus Units When the IP address is set by the CX Programmer and the defaults are used for all other Unit settings the settings will be as shown below CSIG CJIG GPU45 Program IP address Set by CX Programmer Subn
211. igit and the bottom switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When using the automatic generation method either dynamic or passive for address conversion set the rightmost byte of the IP address set for the Ether net Unit to the same value as the node address If this is not possible either the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communi cations If the FINS communications service is not used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right to overlap with other Ethernet Units The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the ERC indicator will light Mounting to a PLC Unit Operating Mode Change Function Section 2 3 If the node address is set to 00 the Unit operating mode change function will start This function changes the format for the Unit Setup in the CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area when converting to a CS1W ETN21 or CJU1W ETN21 Ether net Unit from one of the previous models CS1W ETNO1 11 or CJ1W ET11 For details refer to 2 12 Converting from Previous Models 2 3 Mounting to a PLC 2 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC Note Ethernet Units can be mounted to any slots in either a CS series CPU Rack or a CS series Expansion CPU Rack but the number of slot
212. in a communications port completion code Timing of Communications Flag Changes e The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communica tions and turns ON when they are completed regardless of whether or not an error occurs e The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next trans mission or reception e The Communications Port Error Flag turns OFF with the execution of the next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal comple tion 143 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 Example Communications Port Enabled Flag j Communications instruction instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 3 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 being executed being executed i being executed Communications Port Error Flag Communications Port Completion Code 0000 0000 0000 Completion 0202 0000 Normal completion 0000 Normal completion Unit address setting error 144 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 6 6 5 Program Example Execution condition See note 000000 A20207 120002 I N 120001 120000 MOV 21 000A D00000 MOV 21 0002 D00001 MOV 21 0400 D00002 MOV 21 0705 D00003 MOV 21 0064 D00004 XFER 70 000A 0000 D00010 SEND 90 D00010 D00020 D00000 120000 A20207 See note H DIFU 13 120001 120000 A21907 an Continued on
213. in the following sequence Ts 2 10 11 The number of times active connections were correctly established The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish a passive connection The number of times active or passive connections were correctly estab lished The number of times an established connection was cut off The number of times the connection wait status was cut off The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated structures were released The number of segments for the round trip time time from segment trans mission to ACK The number of times the round trip time was changed The number of times a delayed acknowledgement ACK was sent If the order of the received segments is reversed ACK is sent with a packet of data separate from ACK response to input data etc or is immediately sent with the ACK for other data The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was re turned after several resend attempts The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set time The resend timer sets the maximum time limit between the data being out put and ACK being returned 191 Command Response Reference 192 1 2 3 1 2 3 12 13 14 15 Section 7 3 The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time set on the duration timer The duration timer sets the maximum time limit for a window adve
214. in the following ways e Using the CX Programmer offline e Using the CX Programmer online with the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the Programming Console with the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the CPU Unit s automatic I O allocation at startup This method is available for the CJ Series only From here on operations involving the Programming Console are described 2 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC To create the I O tables connect a Programming Device such as a CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to the PLC Applicable Programming The following Programming Devices can be used with CS CJ series PLCs Devices 39 Creating I O Tables Connecting Programming Devices Section 2 6 Programming Console Model number Key Sheet required Recommended cable required C200H PRO27 E CS1W KS001 E CS1W CN224 cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 cable length 6 0 m CQM1 PRO01 E CS1W CN1 14 cable length 0 1 m CX Programmer Version 3 20 or Higher and CX Integrator The operations are explained here using a Programming Console For details regarding the CX Programmer and the CX Integrator refer to the CX Pro grammer User s Manual Refer to the CX ntegrator Operation Manual W445 for connection procedures and operating procedures for the CX Integrator CX Integrator is software that comes with CX One and is automatically installed when CX One is installed To connect a Programming Consol
215. in the record occurred If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the num ber of records parameter all records stored in the error log at the time the command is executed will be returned and the command executed will end normally Response code Description Normal Command too large Command too small Beginning record number is out of range The number of read records is 0 7 3 8 ERROR LOG CLEAR Command Block Response Block Response Codes 166 Clears the number of records stored in the Ethernet Unit error log 21 03 Command code Command Response code code 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large Command Response Reference Section 7 3 7 3 9 UDP OPEN REQUEST Command Block Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command UDP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Local UDP Port Number Command Response Codes Requests processing to open a socket STG eel _ Results storage area Local UDP port number Command code UDP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Ba Results storage response code The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 The UDP socket number to be opened specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first b
216. ing communications applications 7 TCP IP keep alive 49 TCP UDP Open Flag 80 terminal blocks xxiii Test command 6 73 Timer Area 136 timers 231 transmission delays 147 distance CJ series 14 CS series 13 media CJ series 14 CS series 13 path CJ series 14 CS series 13 Trigger No field 70 troubleshooting FINS communications 210 FTP server 217 procedures 209 socket services 227 startup 209 TCP sockets 214 UDP sockets 211 UNIX error messages 227 using indicators 200 using response codes 223 twisted pair cables 11 precautions 35 recommended models 35 TXT extension 73 U UDP CLOSE REQUEST 171 UDP communications 17 sockets troubleshooting 211 255 Index UDP Nodes Tab 132 UDP OPEN REQUEST 167 UDP Open Request Switch 85 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST 168 UDP SEND REQUEST 169 UDP IP 2 8 115 creating communications applications 7 UDP TCP sockets status bits 80 UMBackup command 6 73 Unit Number Switch 23 unit numbers setting 31 32 UNIX error messages 227 Use IP address to protect field 64 Use POP before SMTP field 67 V vibration resistance CJ series 14 CS series 13 Visual BASIC 12 Visual C 12 W weight CJ series 14 CS series 14 wiring cables 38 precautions 38 word addresses 90 158 Word value change field 71 Work Area 136 256 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front
217. ing sent The number of bytes in the data sent by this command Up to 1 984 bytes can be specified or up to 1 472 bytes can be specified if the broadcast address is specified as the send destination The results storage area stores the actual number of bytes sent Specifies the data sent to the remote node Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small The number of bytes sent does not match the sent data length Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description 1100 UDP socket number or number of bytes sent is out of range The destination IP address is 0 Local UDP port number is 0 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 1103 Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area 220F Specified socket is currently sending 2210 The specified socket is not open 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code Description Normal Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS The send destination IP address is a broadcast address and the number of bytes sent exceeds 1 472 EMSGSIZE Incorrect network number Incorrect destination IP address EADDRNOTAVAIL Incorrect destination IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table Router inc
218. ion 5 20 receiving at PLC 6 sending data 5 sending equipment status 5 EMC Directives xxv EMI countermeasures 37 EMI Standard xxv EMS Standard xxv ERC indicator 26 troubleshooting 200 ERH indicator 26 troubleshooting 200 ERROR LOG CLEAR 166 ERROR LOG READ 165 ErrorLogClear command 6 73 ErrorLogRead command 6 73 errors alignment 163 controller status 161 error codes 203 error log 202 clearing 166 reading 165 error status 201 flags FINS communications 162 response codes 223 short packets 163 status 83 201 unit numbers 91 UNIX error messages 227 Ethernet communications 16 addresses reading from Unit 160 exchanging data between PLCs 4 parameters 231 Ethernet Connector 23 38 Ethernet Unit Setup 41 Ethernet Units mounting 33 reading status 193 replacing 239 resetting 159 ETN condition field 71 ETN11 mode 53 converting from ETN21 mode 59 converting to ETN21 mode 58 ETN21 mode converting from ETN11 mode 58 converting to ETN11 mode 59 F FileDelete 6 FileDelete command 73 FileList command 6 73 FileRead command 6 73 FileWrite command 6 73 FINS communications 9 17 commands 156 159 format 157 from PLCs 135 sending 135 socket services 157 data contents 136 data length 135 destination 135 Index echo test 52 memory areas 158 node addresses 9 overview 17 port numbers 136 response codes 156 223 response monitor time 136
219. ion 8 4 8 4 4 TCP Socket Problems General Problems General Problems Go through the procedure in 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 before starting this procedure Is the response code a value other than 0000 Go to 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Go to 8 6 Results Storage Area fs the response code Response Codes There will be no in the results storage response code in the results storage area area a value other than if Socket Service Request Switches are 0000 being used Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS There may be too much traffic going on the network Reduce network traffic Y Have any send collisions occurred Go to Network Connection Problems 214 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Opening Problems Opening Problems occurred Are you attempting an active open Use an active open at the Is the passive open remote node not finishing Is the response Read socket status using code in the results storage the FINS command READ area a value other SOCKET STATUS han 00492 Make sure that the same port number is not being used simultaneously by more than one process including FTP services Sockets can remain in ESTABLISHED or some later status even if closed be sure to close ports from both sides of the connection A socket can remain ope
220. it IP address 192 168 250 2 Ethernet port Target PLC1 Ethernet Network number none FINS TCP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting PLC name PLC1 Network classification FinsGateway Network Tab FINS destination Network number 0 Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds 134 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CX Programmer s Unit Setup Setup Tab Broadcast All ones 4 3BSD FINS TCP port Default 9600 IP address 0 0 0 0 Use default IP address Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Baud rate Automatic detection IP router tables FINS TCP Tab None Not set All defaults are used FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Setup TCP Nodes Tab Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box Node address 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Destination port number 9600 Keep alive setting Selected yes 6 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs FINS commands can be sent from the user s ladder diagram program in the PLC by using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions SEND 090 Writes I O data from the local node to another node RECV 098 Reads I O data from another node to the local node CMND 490 Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as send ing and receiving I O memory data to and from other nodes rea
221. it is faulty Replace the Ethernet Unit The CPU Unit or Backplane is faulty Replace the CPU Unit or the Back plane The mounting screws on the Ethernet Tighten the mounting screws to the Unit are loose CS Series or the sliders specified torque CS Series or lock are not properly locked into place CJ the sliders into place CJ Series Series Not lit Lit Not lit g The node address is set outside the cor Set the node address to between 01 rect range on the rotary switches and FE Hex The Ethernet Unit is faulty Restart the PLC If the problem per sists replace the Ethernet Unit Not lit Not lit Lit 5 The unit number on the Ethernet Unit is Correct the unit number setting not set correctly on the rotary switch The I O tables are not registered in the Register the I O tables CPU Unit The same unit number is being used on Correct the unit number another Unit as well The CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Lit Not lit There is no communications link with the If power is not turned ON to the hub hub turn it ON If there is crossed cable between the Ethernet Unit and the hub use straight cable Lit Lit There is a mistake in the Unit Setup or Read the error history and correct routing tables the data that is causing the error If the problem persists replace the CPU Unit Memory in the CPU Unit is faulty Restart the CPU Unit I
222. ive FINS TCP Connection Setup Contents Default Shows the connection number This is a network API used when TCP is used for the FINS communica tions service It corresponds to a socket in the socket services Up to 16 can be used at a time and they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16 The Ethernet Unit can thus simultaneously execute the FINS communications service by TCP with up to 16 remote nodes Use IP address When this option is selected if the Ethernet Unit is to protect set for use as a server and if a connection number other than 0 0 0 0 is set for a destination IP address any connection request from other than the number set for that IP address will be denied Select this option to prevent faulty operation by FINS commands from specific nodes from affecting the PLC 64 FINS TCP Section 3 2 The following settings can be made for each connection number FINS TCP Mode Contents For each connection number this setting specifies the Ethernet Unit for use as either a server or a cli ent When the Ethernet Unit is used as a server The Ethernet Unit opens a connection with that connection number and waits for service requests FINS commands from clients Connection num bers are used in ascending order and allocated to clients in the order connections are made When the Ethernet Unit is used as a client The Ethernet Unit establishes a connection with the server
223. ive test can be executed Checked FinsSend If checked FINS commands can be executed Not checked 73 Auto Adjust Time Section 3 9 For details refer to SECTION 3 Mail Receive Function in the Operation Man ual Construction of Applications 3 9 Auto Adjust Time File Options Help FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP MailAddress Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time 14 gt m SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Server Setup Auto Adjust Time po fo fo h m s Server specification type IP Address Host Name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Host name Port No fp 0 default 123 Retry timer 0 Sjsec 0 default 10 paola A SE fE trem 12 00 to 13 00 CS1G CJ1G CPU45 Program SNTP Server Setup Contents Default Get the time If this option is selected the CPU Unit s clock is set to Not information from the time at the SNTP server s clock checked the SNTP The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to server which the Ethernet Unit is mounted Auto Adjust Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be Time accessed to synchronize the clocks When the time that is set here arrives the SNTP server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is adjusted to match the SNTP server clock Server specifi Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic IP Address cation type clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or by host domain name i e by hos
224. ixed or variable cated auto matically when not determined There are two kinds of IP addresses private and global e Global addresses These are IP addresses that connect directly to the Private addresses addresses Internet Allocated by application to NIC each address is unique in the world and as many as 4 3 million can be allocated worldwide These are IP addresses for Intranet LAN use and cannot connect directly to the Internet Frames that include private IP addresses are restricted by the router from being sent outside the LAN Generally as shown below global addresses in the intranet are allocated only to IP routers such as broadband routers interfacing with the Internet All other nodes in the intranet including the Ethernet Unit are allocated private 107 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 Intranet Personal computer CX Programmer etc Ethernet Firewall I Private address IP router ZN i A Not output to Internet Internet Global address f q N required i Intranet Not output to Internet ARISA a E E E EEE DS Bre ie oar Global address IP router Private address Private address Personal computer CX Programmer etc Firewall Ethernet Communications Services A global address is required f
225. ject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Z Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the Ethernet Unit N WARNING Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground of 100 or less when installing the Units Not connecting to a ground of 100 or less may result in electric shock xxiii Application Precautions 5 e Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit Slaves and Commu nications Units before attempting any of the following Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock e Mounting or dismounting I O Units CPU Units Memory Packs or Master Units e Assembling the Units Setting DIP switches or rotary switches e Connecting cables or wiring the system N Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of xxiv the Ethernet Unit or the system or could damage the Ethernet Unit Always heed these precautions e Fail safe measures must
226. l format header error F107 Mail format body error F201 Parameter error F301 Decoding error F302 File attachment error filename error data format error I O memory write size error F303 No attached file F304 Non specified file attachment received F305 File attachment too large Other FINS error response code Refer to the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Cre ating FINS Applications and cor rect the remote node i e the application on the personal com puter Clock data write error 0001 Clock data could not be refreshed because of a CPU Unit error Clear the CPU Unit error 0002 Clock data could not be refreshed because the CPU Unit could not write clock data in that operation mode Refer to the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Automatic Clock Adjustment Function and check the operat ing conditions 207 Error Log Section 8 3 Error Meaning Detailed error code Correction EE code CPU Bus Unit error 1st byte 2nd byte PROM Arbitrary Restart the CPU Unit If the prob Saved lem persists replace the Ethernet Unit 208 CPU Bus Unit memory error Note 01 Read 06 Error log Restart the CPU Unit If the prob Saved error lem persists replace the Ethernet except 02 Write Unit for error error log 1 The time information in the CPU Unit is used in the CPU Bus Units 2 If the
227. larly FINS communications and UDP sockets If these values are consis tently high check your applications a Precautions The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer without WAIT when there were no short buffers available The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer with WAIT when there were no short buffers available The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a short buffer already being used by another socket when there were no short buffers available All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup These values are cleared when the Ethernet Unit is started or reset Values will be counted only until the maximum values are reached 194 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 7 3 27 SOCKET STATUS READ Reads the Ethernet Unit network socket status 27 64 Command Block UHH Command code Response Block 27 64 ee 32 bytes 32 bytes emia Command Response Socket status 9 777777777777 Socket status code code Parameters Socket Status Response Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes each A maximum of 62 records can be returned The format of each record is shown below Protocol 4 bytes The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number 00 00 00 06 TCP 00 00 00 11 UDP
228. llowing diagram 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 me aie Rae ea eed Bit 02 IP address setting error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error 14 13 12 11 10 Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error Status Manipulated by Unit operation Not used IP address setting error ON if any of the following conditions apply to the IP address All bits in the host ID are 0 or 1 All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1 All bits in the subnet ID are 1 e The IP address begins with 127 0x7F OFF when the IP address is normal IP address table error On if the IP address table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal IP router table error ON if the IP router table information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table is normal DNS server error ON when the following errors occur during DNS server operation e An illegal server IP address is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when DNS server operation is normal Routing table error ON if the routing table information is incorrect OFF when the routing table is normal Not used 83 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Bit Error Status Manipulated by Unit operation SNTP server error ON when th
229. lt 110 to be used for POP3 cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment The PLC can acquire clock data through the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the SNTP server via the intranet even if it is a private address The TCP port number default 123 to be used for SNTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 6 Host Name Designation e The PLC can acquire the server IP address for the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the DNS server via the intranet even if Ethernet Unit s IP address is a private address The UDP TCP port number default 53 to be used for DNS cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Network Security and Firewalls Setting a global IP address for an Ethernet Unit involves network security con siderations It is recommended that the user contract with a communications company for a dedicated line rather than using a general line such as a blue band Also be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider security measures such as a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications company on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications company SECTION 6 FINS Communications This section provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands The information provided in
230. mation displayed on the window from the Web browser for the Ethernet Unit is as follows Unit Setup Functions Menuitemn Parameter item Corresponding CX Programmer function CX Programmer s Ethernet Unit Setup window Settings IP address and Protocols System IP address Unit Setup window Se up Tab P Address Net mask Unit Setup window Se up Tab Sub net Mask FINS UDP Port Unit Setup window Se up Tab FINS UDP Port FINS TCP Port Unit Setup window Se up Tab FINS TCP Port Address conversion mode Unit Setup window Se up Tab Conversion Auto Dynamic Unit Setup window Se up Tab Auto dynamic Auto Static Unit Setup window Se up Tab Auto Static Manual Unit Setup window Se up Tab Table used Auto amp Manual Unit Setup window Se up Tab Mixed Destination IP address is changed dynamically Unit Setup window Se up Tab Destination IP Address Change Dynamically Destination IP address is Not changed dynamically Unit Setup window Se up Tab Destination IP Address Change Dynamically ETN11 compatible mode None Broadcast option Unit Setup window Se up Tab Broadcast Baud rate Unit Setup window Se up Tab Baud Rate TCP IP keep alive Unit Setup window Se up Tab TCP IP keep alive FINS TCP Protected Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Use
231. mber CS1W ETN21 Type 100Base TX Can be used as 10Base T Applicable PLCs CS series PLCs Unit classification CS series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be 4 max including Expansion Racks mounted Transfer Media access CSMA CD specifica method tions Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX 10 Mbit s 10Base T Transmission media Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Unshielded twisted pair UDP cable Categories 5 5e Categories 3 4 5 5e Shielded twisted pair STP cable Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Categories 100 Q at 3 4 5 5e Transmission dis 100 m distance between hub and node tance Number of cascade 2 connections Current consumption Unit 380 mA max at 5 V DC Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS 0040 10 to 57Hz 0 075 mm amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes each sweep time 8 minutes x 10 sweeps 80 minutes Shock resistance Conforms to JIS 0041 147m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions 13 Specifications Section 1 4 Item Specifications Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free of corrosive gas Ambient storage temperature 20 to 75 C Weight 200 g max Dimensions
232. mber of buffers 192 Protocol name FINS UDP method FINS TCP method Protocol used UDP IP TCP IP The selection of UDP IP or TCP IP is made by means of the FINS TCP Tab in the CX Pro grammer s Unit Setup Number of connections 16 Port number 9600 default 9600 default Can be changed Can be changed Protection No Yes Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a server Other Items set foreach UDP _ Items set for each connection port e Server client specification Broadcast e Remote IP address specification IP address conversion When client Specify remote Ethernet Unit server IP address When server Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con nect e Automatic FINS node address allocation Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses e Keep alive Specify whether remote node keep alive is to be used TCP IP Setting Remote node keep alive time Internal table This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses remote IP addresses TCP UDP and remote port numbers It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted and it is automatically changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS TCP method or when a FINS command received The following functions are enabled by using this table e IP address conversion using the FINS UDP method e Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the
233. method FINS UDP With the static method however data in an internal table that has been gener ated is not freely changed Ethernet Unit CPU Unit Remote FINS node number Personal computer Local FINS node number Must be fixed Automatic generation static setting Internal table Local FINS node number ry Must be fixed Y Local IP address ry Y Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command Ethernet IP address FINS response m 7 98 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 IP Address Table Method Combined Method With this method FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based on acorrespondence table IP address table that is preset in the Unit setup The IP address table is set using the CX Programmer in P Address Table under Settings in the Unit Setup It can be registered for nodes in different segments and with different network numbers The internal table will be as follows FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connection method FINS UDP FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The followin
234. mission gt Sta tus of transmission condition setting 6 e Status of mail transmission when error occurs Status of transmission condition setting 7 Mail receive function e Cannot be used Automatic clock adjustment function e Cannot be used DNS server host name e Cannot be used 1 These limitations do not apply when the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format is in ETN21 mode 2 When I O tables are created using one of the new Ethernet Unit models the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area format is in ETN21 mode from the beginning Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 Checking the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format Checking with the CX Programmer s Software Switches Statu File Options Help M FTP Server Status on standby Emm s Tab Window Us Enor Status TCP Socket Connection Status FINS TCP Connection Status Ma 4 gt Power Supply r Memory Send Mail Unit Control Switch 24 not supplied Not Accessing T Start to post mail Tl Force closure Link Status r Memory Receive Mail Establishing Not Accessing m UDP TCP Socket Status 01 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 02 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 03 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 04 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 05 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 06 UDP Notopen Normal Com
235. n be executed each time by the ladder program To use the automatic clock adjustment function there must be a separate SNTP server on the network Aside from the IP address the host name used for DNS service can be specified for the SNTP server SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications The transmission medium has been upgraded to 100Base TX while compati bility with the functions and application interfaces of the existing Ethernet Unit models CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 has been main tained Moreover processing speed has been improved so that the system response performance for the same FINS message applications is now up to four times faster Various Protocols Available on Ethernet A variety of protocols makes available a wide range of applications for use on an Ethernet network The protocols that can be selected include sending and receiving data by TCP IP or UDP IP socket services sending and receiving commands by OMRON s standard protocol FINS transferring files by FTP sending and receiving e mail by SMTP POP3 and automatically adjusting the PLC s internal clock by SNTP A communications service can be selected according to need allowing the PLC to be flexibly integrated with the Ethernet information network Communications by UDP IP and TCP IP Socket Services Function The standard Ethernet protocols UDP IP and TCP IP are supported making
236. n broadcasting do not require a response Use the FINS UDP method for broadcasting 6 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas 136 Note The following table shows the I O data areas involved when SEND 090 and RECV 098 are used CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 Work Area W000 to W511 Holding Area H000 to H511 Auxiliary Area A000 to A959 See note 1 Timer Area TIMO000 to 4095 Counter Area CNT0000 to 4095 DM Area D00000 to D32767 EM Area E00000 to E32767 See note 2 1 Data cannot be written to words A000 to A447 in the Auxiliary Area 2 A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used For details regarding the EM Area refer to the operation manual for the PLC that is used Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 6 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 SEND 090 SEND 90 Make the settings shown below when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the user s ladder diagram program in the PC The SEND 090 instruction sends the data in n number of words starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the words starting from the begin ning word D at the remote destination node node address N Local node Destination node number N 15 0 15 0 D gt Number of words gt gt S Local node beginning word D Destination beginning word C First word of control data below cL 0
237. n in TIME WAIT status for up to one minute on the side that closes the socket first we recommend that the active side port number be set to 0 and that you close the socket from the active side If you are using the Socket Service Request Switches check the response code to see if it is 0049 Hex Does the port number being used exist at the local node Return to General Problems Closing Problems Refer to General Problems on page 214 215 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Reception Problems Reception problems occurred Is the remote node not processing to send data Is reception processing not finishing Adjust the remote node to process send data Read memory status using the FINS command READ MEMORY STATUS There may be too much load on the Ethernet Is the network Unit If the memory exhaustion records show memory being used counts processing may be slow Check your ore than 80 applications If you are using the Socket Service Request Switches check the response code to see if it is other than 0000 Hex The remote node s TCP socket has closed Is the response N Is the number of Close the local socket code in the results storage bytes received in the area a value other results storage than 00002 area 0 Return to the procedure for general problems Transmission Problems Transmission problem occurred i Read socket status usin
238. n when power is turned ON e Remote node connection check by PING command e Remote node connection check by internode test Error log for recording error information when an error occurs e Notification by e mail when an error occurs 10 System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 1 System Configuration CX Programmer CX Integrator FinsGateway 3 Hub 2 Twisted pair cable 1 CS1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit 1 CU1W ETN21 Ethernet Unit 100Base TX 100Base TX CS series Cu series PLC 1 3 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network The basic configuration for a 100Base TX Ethernet System consists of one hub to which nodes are attached in star form using twisted pair cable The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network with 100Base TX type CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units so prepare them in advance Network device Contents 1 CS series Ethernet These Ethernet Units are Communications Units that Units CS1W ETN21 connect a CS series or CJ series PLC to 100Base TX or CJ series Ethernet Ethernet networks They can also be used as 10Base T Units CU1W ETN21 2 Twisted pair cable This is twisted pair cable for connecting 100Base TX type Ethernet Units to the hub with an RJ45 Modular Connec tor at each end Use a category 3 4 5 or 5e UTP unshielded twisted pair or STP shielded twisted pair
239. nal computer and UNIX machine socket interfaces to cre ate applications using FINS communications xiii Relevant Manuals The following table lists CS and CJ series manuals that contain information relevant to Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Net works this manual Contents Provides information on operating and installing 100Base TX Ethernet Units including details on basic settings and FINS communications Refer to the Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communications service CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Applications Provides information on constructing host applications for 100Base TX Ethernet Units including functions for send ing receiving mail socket service automatic clock adjust ment FTP server functions and FINS communications CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base 5 and 10Base T Ethernet Units CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CS1D CPU H CS1D CPU S CJ1M CPU CS1W SCU2 CS1W SCB2 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU P CJ1G CPU 1 V1 1 V1 41 V1 H CJ1W SCU
240. nces EEPROM error ON if an error has occurred in the EEPROM memory OFF when the EEPROM memory is normal 8 3 Error Log The Ethernet Unit provides an error log that records errors that have occurred during Ethernet Unit operation The contents of the error log can be read or cleared from a Programming Device such as the CX Programmer or it can be read or cleared using FINS commands from a workstation or computer See 7 3 7 ERROR LOG READ and 7 3 8 ERROR LOG CLEAR Logged Errors The following errors are recorded in the error log e Errors in network operation e Errors in data transfers e Error in the CPU Unit 202 Error Log Error Log Table Error Log Location FINS Commands for Error Logs 8 3 1 Meaning Watchdog timer error in CPU Unit 00 00 Section 8 3 Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table Up to 64 records can be saved If more than 64 errors occur the oldest errors will be deleted from the error log and the most recent error will be recorded The following information is recorded in the error log table e Main error code See table later in this section e Detailed error code See table later in this section e Time stamp from the clock in the CPU Unit When an error is detected the error codes and time stamp are recorded in the error log in RAM inside the Ethernet Unit Serious errors are also recorded in EEPROM The maximum number of errors that can b
241. nd them before attempting to install an Ethernet System Unless you are already experienced in installing com munications systems we strongly recommend that you employ a profes sional to install your system e Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise If noise prone environments are unavoidable be sure to take adequate measures against noise interference such as installing network components in grounded metal cases using optical links in the system etc 34 Network Installation 2 4 2 Recommended Products The following products are recommended for use with the CS1W ETN21 Section 2 4 Ethernet Unit Specifications Inquires Hub 100BASE TX PHOE SWITCH 10 100 Mbit s 5 port hub NIX 5TX CON TACT Allied RH509E 9 port hub Allied Telesis Telesis MR820TLX 9 port hub with 10Base 5 0120 86 0442 backbone port in Japan only 10BASE T Allied RH509E 9 port hub Allied Telesis Telesis MR820TLX 9 port hub with 10Base 5 0120 86 0442 backbone port in Japan only Twisted pair 100BASE TX cable Fujikura F LINK E STP shielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P__ pair cable Category 5 5e Note Impedance is lim ited to 100 Q Fujikura CTP LAN5 UTP unshielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P__ pair cable Category 5 5e 10BASE T Fujikura F LINK E STP shielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P__ pair cable Category 3 4 5 5e Note Impedance is lim ited to 100 Q Fujiku
242. nection of multiple applica tions in a per sonal computer Not possible Possible with both UDP IP and TCP IP Mail functions Mail send function only E mail attachments with I O memory data are now possible for the mail send function SMTP client function file attachment func tion With the mail receive function commands can be received from the PLC POP3 client function mail receive function FTP server function Socket services function The following features have been added to the TCP socket services function e Use of keep alive Number of bytes of data received for TCP socket Nos 1 to 8 e Status of TCP socket Nos 1 to 8 Data Received Flag Automatic clock information adjustment Not possible CPU Unit built in clock can be adjusted from SNTP server SNTP client function 27 Unit Version Upgrade Information Section 1 8 1 8 Unit Version Upgrade Information The details of the upgrade to the Ethernet Unit version are as follows m Unit Version 1 3 Upgrade Details Web function added The unit settings and status monitoring for the Ethernet Unit can be easily performed from a Web browser Function prohibiting Access to change the remote IP address from a node using access using FINS FINS UDP can be prohibited IP address protection UDP from nodes with dynamically changed IP addresses m Unit Version 1 4 Upgrade Details ETN11 compatible
243. net ID All bits in the Subnet Mask that correspond to the bits in the IP address used either as the Network ID or Subnet ID are set to 1 and the remaining bits which correspond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the Host ID are set to 0 The following example shows the Subnet Mask for an 8 bit Subnet ID used in a class B IP address Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network ID 14 bits Host ID 16 bits Subnet mask 1111111111111111 1111111100000000 FFFFFFO0O 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt Network number Subnet number Host number Set the same Subnet Mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork If no subnetworks are used there is no need to set Subnet Masks In that case the following Subnet Mask values will be used depending on the IP address class Class Subnet Mask value 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 95 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 5 2 5 2 1 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network IP addresses UDP port numbers and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node addresses to specify nodes on the network Application level Transport level Internet level Physical level FINS Node number UDP TCP UDP port number IP TCP port number IP address i M
244. net Unit s Web window is displayed by accessing the follow ing URL from the Web browser URL http Ethernet Unit s IP address 0 Use the following procedure to set the Unit s system settings IP address in this example using Internet Explorer version 6 0 and the Ethernet Units Web function 43 Using the Web Browser Setting Function Section 2 8 1 2 3 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser In this example the URL is specified as http 192 168 250 1 0 using the 5 x Le eek gt amp A A Reach Favorites Ameda A B Address http 192 168 250 1 0 x Eao Links gt gt OMRON Ethernet unit E Done I E Local intranet 2 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu ETI unit setting Micro aa lolx File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea esak gt Q A A Reach Favorites media B B Address E http 4 192 168 250 1 0 z Go Links OMRON Ethernet unit Settines 44 Using the Web Browser Setting Function Section 2 8 3 Select 1 IP address and Protocols System to display the Login Pass word field on the right of the window E http 192 168 250 1 0 4 Input the default password ETHERNET all in upper case and click the Login Button 5 The settings in the System menu will be displayed The following window shows the default system settings
245. ng CS1G CJ1G CPU45 Contents Program Default Protect using mail If this option is selected mail from sources Not checked address other than specified addresses is denied Use the Mail address text box below to spec ify the sources from which to receive mail Mail address Set the mail address if the option has been None 72 checked to protect using mail address Mail will not be accepted from sources other than the mail address set here Receive Mail Receive Attached File Setting Receive file with specified extension only Section 3 8 Contents If this option is selected only file attachments with specified extensions is accepted with mail Use the checkboxes below to select which file extensions are to be accepted Multiple exten sions can be selected Default Not checked OBJ If this option is selected an OBJ file which can be created using the CX Programmer contain ing all cyclic task and interrupt task programs in the CPU Unit will be received If this option is selected an STD file containing the PLC Setup registered I O tables routing tables Unit Setups etc which can be read from the CPU Unit using the CX Programmer will be received If this option is selected an IOM file containing bit data from beginning to end of a memory area which can be created using the CX Pro grammer will be received CSV If this option is selected
246. ng data from being sent Correct the user application to reduce traffic at the Ethernet Unit 20 21 25 26 FINS TCP not connected Unit settings The socket is not open for Sys tem Settings The socket is not open because of the remote node conversion command for the FINS TCP connection The socket is reopening because the connection to the remote node has closed The socket is reopening because of a reception error The socket is reopening because of a transmission error The socket is reopening because RST received in response to keep alive The socket is reopening because of no keep alive response Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number 30 Connection not establish Command data A connection is already estab lished with the specified remote node Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number 31 Connection cannot be changed Unit settings and command data The specified connection num ber is not set as a FINS TCP client in the Unit Setup Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number 32 Service stopped cannot perform operation Command data While a remote node change was being processed for the
247. ning word n CIO 1500 25 x unit number 15 8 7 0 Data direction Related communications services Unit Control Switch CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit Socket Services UDP Socket No 1 Status UDP Socket No 8 Status TCP Socket No 1 Status TCP Socket No 8 Status Service Status Error Status Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 6 l Mail Function Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 2 l Socket Services l Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 6 FTP Service etc All error conditions Socket Service Re quest Switches 1 Socket Service Re quest Switches 2 i Socket Service Re Socket Service Re quest Switches 4 quest Switches 3 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re quest Switches 6 _ quest Switches 5 Socket Service Re Socket Service Re quest Switches 8 quest Switches 7 FINS TCP Connection Status Not used mener CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit E N E ee ee ere ee Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit Socket Services Refer to Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 6 FINS Communications The following items in the diagram can also be checked using software switch Refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications settings on the CX Programmer e The status of UDP TCP sock
248. nit s system settings HTTP password setting in this example using Internet Explorer version 6 0 and the Ethernet Units Web function 245 246 Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 1 Connect to the Ethernet Unit from the Web browser In this example the URL is specified as http 192 168 250 1 0 using the Ethernet Unit s default IP address EUNE Microsoft Internet p x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea ok gt OA A Qseach Favores Greta G B 5 Address http 192 168 250 1 0 x Go Links i OMRON Ethernet unit E Done E Localintranet 2 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu AOMRON Ethernet unit setting Microsoft Inte 10 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea era lt gt r OA Al search Garavortes Greda Bl Br S ee __ ZAC 0 inks OMRON Ethernet unit Settines 3 Select 1 IP address and Protocols System to display the Login Password field on the right of the window E OMRON Ether setting Micr File Edit View Favorites Tools Help f Back gt amp A A Asearch fyravorites meda lt 4 Gy 4 Address http 192 168 250 1 0 OMRON Ethernet unit Please input Login Password Settings Login Password Login Ethernet Unit Web Function Appendix G 4 http 192 168 250 1 0 hetp s 192 168 250 1 00 as Bre fT Use Input Port No De
249. nit to differentiate between Ethernet Units with different unit versions Unit Version Notation In this manual the unit version of a Ethernet Unit is given as shown in the fol Product nameplate lowing table Notation used in this manual Special remarks Ver 2 0 or later number shown to right of the lot number Ethernet Unit Ver 1 3 or later Information without reference to specific Unit Versions applies to all versions of the Unit Blank to the right of lot number Pre Ver 1 3 Ethernet Units Vii TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS recobridor ossaa debe chee eens oe 1 Intended Audience i emase tse bth ais scp N dally 8 Soba seb Fae pale ere sonia eas 2 General Precautions csv nng scose tung e sere OAS Harsh OBA Babee ee Fubhe Male eee howe dines 3 Safety Pr cautionsss v n0 5 44s bund NO eu Sgro g MS Glens ole Se Sachare ya Sages Salers diene dees 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 cece cece eee nee 5 Application Precautions nyes eeni anuet E E N E A E E A 6 Conformance to EC DIrectives rer raare eee eee E N eens SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration 0eeeee 1 1 Ethernet Unit Function Guide 0 0 0 eee cent eeaeee 1 2 gt Features s i2 d000 e ye te ea Bi he a ie ae ie Re ee deat 1 3 System Configuration snes t 0 0 ec eee eee eee een ene neers 1 4 Specifications 5 3 vec oe ah hha a bedi bed ei oe dia bad s 1 5 Overview of Communications Functions
250. ns 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee ees 96 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 0 00 00 eee eee eee e eens 107 SECTION 6 FINS Communications cccccccccccccccceee 113 6 1 Overview of FINS Communications 0 0 0 e ec errre 114 6 2 FINS UDP Method 0 25 5 onee esate gees Mesa cha Se sabe a 116 6 3 FINS TCP Method 0 hss accep eas Pees be ANd Pela aN Sa eR ee sare bat 118 6 4 Creating Routing Tables pran npa cece eee nee 122 6 5 Using FINS Applications 0 0 0 2 ccc eee eee teenies 126 6 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 0 0 02 cee eee 135 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 0 000 000 008 153 SECTION 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet Units 155 7 1 Command Codes and Response Codes 1 0 0 0 0c eee cence eee 156 7 2 Socket Applications a sensei ean nane r Seis soa ple kts Sabah Sales Salers eager ewe 157 7 3 Command Response Reference 0 0 0 eee eee eee e eae 159 SECTION 8 Troubleshooting 6 c cci eee eee eee es ce eewedowveess 199 8 1 Troubleshooting with Indicators 1 0 cece eee ene 200 8 2 s Error Status A sc tpt ea te bed we Rae bee Sd Re ea ba ee aS 201 23 EMOR LOS aa vaia LAT Weed cing Ue tes MPR ee le be ees eS 202 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures 0 0 cnet ences 209 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes 0 0 00 0 cece eee eee eens 223 8 6 Results Storage Area Response Codes 0 00
251. ns and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xix XX PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CS W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units 100Base TX The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Ethernet Units You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate an Ethernet Unit 1 Intended Audience Saa e eee eee enn eee xxii 2 General Precautions 0 cece cette eee ria xxii 3 Safety Precautions nese ona a ea RERA aN he Ste ee GAR xxii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 0 e eee eee xxiii 5 Application Precautions 0 0 eee cee eee xxiii 6 Conformance to EC Directives 0 0 eee eee eee XXV 6 1 Applicable Directives 0 0 0 XXV 6 2 Concepts ne Se ates eee et ae a Sls cae heise ae eta XXV xxi Intended Audience 1 2 3 xxii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the e
252. nse code Description Normal echo reply received from the remote node Timeout error Command too large Command too small Zero destination address PING command currently being executed High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 7 3 19 FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST Command Block Response Block Parameters FINS TCP Connection No Command Remote IP Address Command Remote Port Number Command 182 Requests a remote node change for the FINS TCP connection The default destination IP address in a connection in which the Ethernet Unit is used as a client is the destination IP address set under the FINS TCP Tab in the Unit Setup By sending this command to the Ethernet Unit the destina tion IP address for the specified connection can be changed to another IP address Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as FINS TCP clients in the Unit Setup LORS Reean Command FINS TCP Remote IP Remote TCP code connection No address port number zo Command Response code code Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the change is to be made Specifies the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Specifies the remote TCP port number must be non zero with this com mand Command Response Reference Response Codes Section 7 3 Response code Description Normal Node a
253. nsiderations Normal Mode 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice peripheral servicing execution given priority time Ethernet Unit is not Set peripheral servicing time given priority Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access 1 ms max For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 2 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Processing time considerations Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Ethernet Unit is Time slice instruction execution time given priority Ethernet Unit is not CPU Unit cycle time given priority Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser vicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port or Inner Board For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 2 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settin
254. nual Describes operating procedures for the CX Integrator net work configuration support software for CS CJ series PLCs Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CX Integrator network configuration support software for CS CJ series PLCs CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PRO01 E C200H PRO27 E Programming Con soles Operation Manual Provides information on how to operate the Programming Console Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform pro gramming CS1W SCB21 V1 41 V1 CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 41 V1 Serial Communica tions Boards and Serial Communica tions Units Operation Manual Accessing the PLC connected to the CX Programmer via Ethernet or the host computer or other device connected to the Serial Communications Board or Unit Describes the use of Serial Communications Units and Boards including details on hardware software and standard system protocols N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the p
255. number Total number code code of of of of of packets received receive errors packets sent errors sent send collisions 161 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Error Flags Response Indicates the operating status and errors that occurred when the Ethernet Unit was started 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit 02 IP address error Bit 03 IP address table error Bit 04 IP router table error Bit 05 DNS server error Bit 06 Routing table error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 12 SMTP server error Bit 13 POP server error Bit 14 Address disagreement Bit 15 EEPROM error The cause of each error is listed below IP Address Error All bits for the network number or host number are set to 0 or 1 IP Address Table Error More than 32 records exist in the IP address table IP Router Table Error More than 8 records exist in an IP router table DNS Server Error e There is an error in the IP address setting for the DNS server A timeout was generated in communications with the DNS server Routing Table Error Local network table contains 0 or more than 16 records Relay network table contains more than 20 records SNTP Server error e There is an error in the setting for the SNTP server host specification i e the IP address or the host name A timeout was generated in communications with the SNTP server SMTP Server error e There is an error in the setting for the SMTP server hos
256. o unit number error 1 Unit number error A40300 to A40308 Memory Error Location When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag A40115 is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A40300 User program A40304 PLC Setup A40305 Registered I O Tables A40307 Routing Table A40308 CPU Bus Unit Settings The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 Normal 1 Error 90 A41000 to A41015 CPU Bus Unit Num ber Duplication Flags The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit s unit number has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 No duplication 1 Duplication Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 3 Word s Bit s A41700 to A41715 Name CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags Function When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A40207 and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue Settings 0 No error 1 Error Read Wri A42700 to A42715 A50100 to A50115
257. ode IP Address Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab IP Address Auto allocated FINS node Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab Auto allocated FINS node keep alive Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab keep alive Connection 9 16 Unit Setup window FINS TCP Tab No 9 to 16 Send Mail Mail address Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Mail address 1 Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Mail address 1 Mail address 2 Unit Setup window Mail Address Tab Mail address 2 Send Mail Unit Setup window Send Mail Tab 244 Trigger No Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Trigger No Trigger option Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Trigger No Not Use Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Send mail upon trigger Software switch Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Software switch Word value change Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Word value change Bit value change Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Bit value change ETN condition change Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab ETN condition at error storage CPU condition change Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab CPU condition Periodic timer Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Periodic timer Mail address Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Mail address Interval time Unit Setup window Send Mai Tab Interval time Include data Send user data Unit
258. ode CPU uniform peripheral servicing time Default 4 Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculations CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 1 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 1 0 4 ms Transmission processing time command 0 550 ms 0 5 ms Transmission delay command 0 0118 ms 0 1 ms Reception processing time command 0 704 ms 0 7 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node 15 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node 0 6 ms Transmission processing time response 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay response 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms Reception processing time response 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 2 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 0 4 ms Total 10 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 74 15 0 6 1 1 0 3 1 5 10 0 4 40 6 ms 6 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications When applications are constructed using FINS communications services communications errors from multiple response timeouts may occasionally occur due to high traffic depending on the system configuration and the appli cation programs This section describes precautions for systems with high traffic in FINS communications m Conditions for High Traffic High traffic may occur if FINS messages from multiple communicating nodes are concentrated at a single Ethernet Unit The Ethernet Unit and the CPU Unit may have insuffic
259. ode address not between 1 and 254 A hardware e g internal memory error has occurred ERH CPU Unit error Not lit CPU Unit normal Lit An error has occurred at the CPU Unit There is an error in the I O table unit number unit setup or routing table settings Flashing An illegal IP address has been set With automatic address gener ation the rightmost two digits of the IP address do not match the node address SD Send Data Yellow Not lit Not sending data ready to send Lit Sending data RD Receive Data Yellow Not lit Not receiving data ready to receive Lit Receiving data LNK Link status Yellow Not lit Link not established between hubs Lit Link established between hubs TCP TCP socket in use Yellow Not lit None of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services is in use Lit At least one of the eight TCP sockets provided for socket services is in use FTP FTP Server Service Yellow Not lit FTP server on standby Lit FTP server operating one user connected HOST Server connection sta tus 26 Yellow Not lit Server DNS SMTP POP3 or SNTP not being used Flashing An error has occurred in the server connection Lit The server connection is normal Comparison with Previous Models Section 1 7 1 7 Comparison with Previous Model
260. of Send Condition Setting 7 Status of Send Condition Setting 8 The transmission status of user mail periodic mail and error log mail are stored in this word as shown in the following table Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch No mail is being sent Mail is being sent Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch The previous mail transmission was completed normally Mail is either waiting to be sent or can be sent using the Mail Send Switch An error occurred in the previous mail transmis sion Mail cannot be sent system setting error While mail is being sent the transmission status of the three bits each for send condition settings 1 to 8 i e bits 02 01 and 00 bits 06 05 and 04 or bits 10 09 an 08 are 0 0 and 1 respectively After the transmission has been completed normally they become 0 1 and 0 If the transmission is ended with an error they become 1 1 and 0 Check this transmission status in the ladder program as required 87 DM Area Allocations Section 4 2 TCP Socket No 1 to 8 Number of Bytes Received Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 1 to m 8 Number of Bytes Received 0000 to 07CO hex For each TCP socket the number of bytes of data in the reception buffer is stored in one word A maximum of 4 096 bytes of data can be held in the reception buffer
261. og in to the Ethernet Unit from a computer FTP client as required and to specify folders and files to be trans ferred The following items can be used as PLC File Memory A Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit e EM File Memory The portion of the EM Area in the CPU Unit s I O mem ory used by the CX Programmer as File Memory SECTION 4 FTP Server Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Creating an Original Communications Procedure Using TCP IP UDP IP for the Host Application or Communicating with PLCs from Another Manufacturer Operation Reference Using the socket services function create a communications application in the ladder program With the socket services function TCP IP or UDP IP can be used directly to receive data Use the socket services to create applications based on manip ulating control bits or the CMND 490 instruction SECTION 4 Socket Service Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Features Section 1 2 Automatically Adjusting the PLC s Internal Clock at Regular Intervals Operation Reference 1 2 Features Compatibility and Speed Use the automatic clock adjustment function With the automatic clock adjustment function the SNTP server s clock is taken as the standard for automatically adjusting the built in clock of the PLC connected to the Ethernet Unit The adjustment can be regularly executed at a specified time once a day and it ca
262. on are provided on the window for each setting item Note To prevent unauthorized Web access the Web function can be disabled Select HTTP Option and deselect the Use Web Function option Click the Set Button followed by the Regist Button This setting is enabled by turning ON the power to the Ethernet Unit again or restarting the Unit This setting can be cancelled only through the CX Programmer Unit Setup version 5 0 or higher rort NO Option Cancel Regist Reload 8 The functions of the other button are as follows e Cancel Button Use this button to cancel the entered value and display the value that was previously set with the Set But ton again If the Set Button has not been clicked the value that was read from the CPU Unit s flash mem ory non volatile memory when the Ethernet Unit was started will be displayed Reload Button Use this button read and display the values saved in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory 9 To enable the unit settings that have been registered in the CPU Unit s flash memory non volatile memory turn the power to the PLC system OFF and ON again or restart the Ethernet Unit 248 Numerics 100M indicator 26 A Account Name field 68 applications precautions xxiii ARP communications 16 ASCII characters 237 Attached file name field 71 Auto Adjust Time Tab 51 74 Auto allocated FINS node field 65 automatic 8 automatic clock adjustment
263. ontroller overflow errors The total number of packets sent by the Ethernet Unit is returned The total number of packet errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was send ing is returned The number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes during Ethernet Unit transmissions Counting of the total number of packets received total number of receive errors total number of packets sent total number of errors sent and total number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value reaches the maximum value 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large INTERNODE ECHO TEST Runs the echo test between specified nodes Command Test data code 08 01 ae 1 998 bytes max Command Response Test data code code 163 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters Test Data Command Response Precautions Response Codes This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 998 bytes can be specified The response sends back data identical to the data specified in the command An abnormality is assumed if the data returned in the response differs from the test data sent The test destination node is the destination node specified in the CMND 194 instruction operands Always specify the unit address of the Ethernet Unit in the CMND 194 instruction Response code Description Normal Command too large Command too small No test data 7 3 5 BROADCAST TEST RE
264. oper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction e Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning e Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning e Wire all connections correctly e Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com pletely e Make sure that the terminal blocks expansion cables and other items with locking devices are locked in place e When transporting the Unit use special packing boxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation Conformance to EC Directives 6 e Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation e Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high ten sion lines e Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra dius e Do not pull on the communications cables e Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables e Always lay communications cable inside ducts e Use appropriate communications cables e Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build
265. or process ing Be careful not to force close sockets during communications or an error will occur After all sockets have been force closed the Ethernet Unit will turn the switch OFF again Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Ports used exclusively by the Ethernet Unit will not be closed Mail Send Switch Bit 3 User mail can be sent by turning ON this switch The contents of the user mail are set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup After the user mail has been sent the Ethernet Unit will turn this switch OFF again Do not attempt to forcibly manipulate this switch before it is automati cally turned OFF by the Unit Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch Bit 4 The automatic clock adjustment can be executed by turning this switch ON The SNTP server required for the automatic clock adjustment is set in the Unit Setup After the automatic clock adjustment has been completed the Ethernet Unit will automatically turn this switch OFF Until then do not forcibly manipulate the switch 79 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Status of UDP TCP Sockets 1 to 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Geet et eel ce eel ele a Data Received Flag Opening Flag Results Storage Error Flag Receiving Flag TCP UDP Open Flag Sending Flag Closing Flag Status Manipulated Unit operation Reference Opening Flag i ON during open processing
266. or send ing mail Up to eight trigger numbers can be regis tered Send mail upon Sets whether or not the selected mail trigger is to Not checked trigger be enabled 70 Send Mail Section 3 7 Item Mail trigger type Select only one Soft ware switch Contents If this option is selected mail is sent whenever the Mail Send Switch turns ON The Mail Send Switch is bit 03 of word n in the words allocated for CPU Bus Units n 1500 25 x unit number Default Checked If this option is selected the value of a specified address is compared with a standard comparison value using one of the following comparison func tions and mail is sent whenever the condition is satisfied lt gt lt lt gt gt Select the address for storing the comparison value from the drop down list Not checked Bit value change If this option is selected mail is sent whenever a specified bit turns ON or whenever it turns OFF Select the bit address from the drop down list below Not checked ETN condition If this option is selected mail is sent whenever a new error is stored in the Ethernet Unit s error log Not checked CPU condition If this option is selected mail is sent whenever any of the following conditions occur at the CPU Unit The drop down list at the right can be used to select which of these three are to serve as mail triggers e When a non fatal error
267. or the Ethernet Unit s IP address when the fol That Require Global lowing communications services are used over the Internet Addresses for Ethernet K l Units e FINS communications services File transfers e Socket services When mail is sent or received over the Internet the Unit s IP address can be a private address 108 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the Ethernet Unit Intranet FINS communications FTP Socket CX Programmer etc FINS TCP client computer Firewall Sending mail Receiving mail ae Intranet Ethernet Unit Private address Internet E mail can be sent and received through the Internet i i l l Lee FINS communications IP router FTP Socket CX Programmer etc l FINS TCP client computer Firewall I I l Communications in Intranet l l Ethernet i l l l J l l l l l l l Communications l in Intranet Ethernet Unit Private address Ethernet Unit Private address EE es a eee J Conditions for Using When the Ethernet Unit has a private address communications applications Communications can be used under the following conditions Applications 1 2 3 1 FINS Communications Service e FINS communications service is enabled only between Ethernet Units with private addresses on the
268. ord _ Error network address Error node address 8 6 Results Storage Area Response Codes The response codes stored in the Results Storage Area can be used to trou bleshoot socket service problems Refer to Socket Services Parameter Area 1 to 8 Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit on page 88 for the location of the response codes stored in the Results Storage Area The UNIX socket service error messages corresponding to the response codes are given in the following table Refer to the documentation for the devices involved when communicating between an Ethernet Unit and other devices Response UNIX error Description Probable remedy code message ESRCH No such process Close the local socket and try reopening it ENXIO No such device or address EBADF Bad file number incorrect socket specification EACCES Permission denied Check the IP address of the remote node and Broadcast address specified for try to reconnect remote IP address for active TCP open EFAULT Bad address copy failed between Close the local socket and try reopening it kernel and user area EEXIST File exists EINVAL Invalid argument socket library argument error EMFILE Too many open files More than 32 sockets EPIPE Broken pipe remote node closed Close the local socket socket EPROTONO Protocol not supported protocol Close the local socket and try reopening it SUPPORT other than UDP TCP or RAW speci fied EPROTOTYPE Pr
269. ork node 1 010 04 1 020 010 004 2 030 07 2 3 3 PLC 4 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 00 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 5 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 01 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 6 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table N Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 030 05 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 PLC 7 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 030 06 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 125 Using FINS Applications Section 6 5 6 5 Using FINS Applications 6 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server The following examples show how to connect online from a CX Programmer on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network m System Configuration Example 1 No Routing In this example an online connection is made by FINS UDP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic CX Programmer CX Integrator Node number
270. orrect the number of data ele ments or other parameters in the command data for which the response is being returned OC Parameter error Parameters in command data Parameters are set incorrectly in the command data Check the command data and correct any parameters that are incorrect 21 Cannot write 08 Cannot change IP address con version method With respect to a FINS node address that could not be dynamically changed a FINS message was received from an IP address that differed from the Unit Setup Referring to SECTION 5 Deter mining IP Addresses correct the relationships between IP addresses and FINS node addresses 225 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Section 8 5 Main code 22 Status error operat ing mode dis agreement Sub code OF Service in progress cannot perform operation Check point Socket status area Probable cause The same socket service is already in progress at the specified socket number Remedy Use the socket status flag in PC memory to be sure that socket service has finished before start ing services again 10 Socket not open Socket status area The specified socket is not open Open the socket For TCP sock ets be sure to wait until connec tion is made 11 Local node busy cannot send System load The internal buffers are full because there is too much traf fic at the local node preventi
271. orrectly set Router incorrectly specified Incorrect destination IP address EHOSTUNREACH 7 3 12 UDP CLOSE REQUEST Requests processing to close a socket Command Block Command Results storage area code UDP socket number Socket option Command Response code code Ta Response code Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command _ The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 UDP Socket Number The UDP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command 171 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Results Storage Area The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first Command byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Response Codes Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small UDP socket number is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area Specified socket is not open High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Results Storage Area Response
272. ort 6 Completion Code Communications Port 7 Completion Code The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as those for FINS commands and responses When CMND 490 is used how ever even if a FINS command has an abnormal completion it will not be reflected in the communications port completion code For details refer to Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes for CMND 490 below Bits 08 to 15 in the communications port completion code correspond to the first byte of the response code and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second byte For details refer to 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND 490 Errors that occur when CMND 490 is used generate a Communications Port Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in the following cases e When a response timeout error has occurred e When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum value for the Unit i e 2 000 bytes for the Ethernet Unit e When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of reception bytes that has been set The response is not stored in this case Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses stored from the beginning response storage word onwards Be careful of these because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are not recorded
273. ot be used because no IP address or host name is set for the SNTP server Using the CX Programmer make the SNTP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SNTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or 127 e The SNTP server host name is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SNTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings Clock information cannot be changed because a bus error occurred between the PLC and the Ethernet Unit Turn OFF the power and restart the PLC If the problem occurs again replace the PLC Backplane or Ethernet Unit For some CPU Unit models and lots there are operation modes in which clock information cannot be changed For the following model and lot numbers clock information cannot be changed while using RUN Mode or Monitor Mode in asynchronous mode e CS1G H CPUOOH Lot Nos 030430 and earlier e CJ1H G CPULIUH All lots Troubleshooting with Response Codes Section 8 5 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Main code 00 Normal completion Sub code 00 You can troubleshoot the errors in FINS communications from the response codes when the SEND 090 RECV
274. otocol wrong type for socket ENOBUFS No buffer space available There is too much load traffic on the Ethernet Unit Check your user applications 227 Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 6 Response code UNIX error message EISCONN Description Socket is already connected con nection attempted to open socket ENOTCONN Socket is not connected send attempted to closed socket EALREADY Operation already in progress con nection attempted to existing non block connection Probable remedy Close the local socket and try reopening it EMSGSIZE Message too long Check the length of send data UDP or TCP 1 to 1 982 bytes UDP broadcasts 1 to 1 472 bytes EDESTADDRREQ Destination address required desti nation address not specified ENOPROTOOPT Protocol not available unsupported option specified ECONNABORTED Software caused connection abort another task closed socket EINPROGRESS Operation now in progress non block connection ended during pro cessing ENOTSOCK Socket operation on non socket EOPNOTSUPP Operation not supported on socket Close the local socket and try reopening it EADDRINUSE Address already in use UDP or TCP open request sent for port already in use Check the port number TCP ports can remain unusable for 1 min after closing ECONNREFUSED Connection refused TC
275. ower versions of the CX Programmer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as personal computer middleware Depending on whether or not the connection will be within the same segment either use an IP address conversion method for dynamic IP addresses in the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service or use the TCP IP ver sion of the FINS communications service It is possible to connect online to a PLC using the CX Programmer from a computer serving as a temporarily connected node or a permanent DHCP cli ent For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use lower versions of the CX Programmer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as personal computer middleware Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Connecting through multiple segments such as over the Internet Use FINS TCP CX Programmer mS lt Ral d FINS IP router Firewall Ethernet Reference Connecting from a computer with a dynamic private IP address Intranet Use FINS TCP or FINS UDP Server room i i Office floor PS 1CX Programmer Q l 1 a a FINS Ethernet Production line Connecting within the same segment X Programmer Use FINS UDP FINS Ethernet Witelese jp CX Programmer P Using
276. pleted Completed Completed 07 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 08 UDP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed 01 TCP Notopen Normal Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed Completed None H CS1G C1G CPU45 Program Checking with the CX Programmer s Unit Setup Window E Window Display in ETN21 Mode Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit File Options Help 2x TCP IP keep alive fo min 0 default 20 Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP m Destination IP Address IV Change Dynamically r Bro m FINS UDP Port m FINS TOP Port Default 9600 Default 9600 C User defined C User defined p p IP Address r Conversion r Baud Rate 0 0 0 0 Auto dynamic Auto C Auto Static C 10BASE T p Sub net Mask C Mixed 0 0 0 C Table used FTP ___________ IP Address Table IP Router Table Login J Password J _rs Port No fo Del 0 default 219 CS1G CJ1G GPLI45 Program 55 Converting from Previous Models Section 2 12 Changing the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Format 56 E Window Display in ETN11 Mode Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit 2 xi File Options Help Setup Mail Setup
277. pli cations Safety Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING A Caution Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Operating Environment Precautions 4 e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits Z Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations sub
278. pplication including a CX Programmer can connect online and communicate over the Inter net with an Ethernet Unit that has a global address FINS TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service method FINS TCP is more reliable than FINS UDP in terms of communications errors involving IP routers The IP address table method is used as the Ethernet Unit s IP address conversion method The TCP port number to be used for FINS TCP cannot be used if prohib ited by a firewall in the communications path 2 Transferring Files Files can be transferred over the Internet between a device such as a per sonal computer i e an FTP client and a PLC with an Ethernet Unit that has a global address The TCP port number to be used for FTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path 111 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 112 Note 3 Sending Mail e The PLC can send the Ethernet Unit s IP address to the SMTP server by mail via the intranet even if it as a private address The TCP port number default 25 to be used for SMTP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communications path Also with some com munications companies there may be restrictions based on mail security considerations on using POP before SMTP 4 Receiving Mail The PLC can receive the Ethernet Unit s IP address from the POP3 server by mail via the intranet even if it as a private address The TCP port number defau
279. programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 121 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 6 4 Creating Routing Tables When the FINS communications service is used routing tables must be cre ated in advance Routing tables are required in the following circumstances e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network The rout ing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS com munications service but also for all relay nodes on the network 6 4 1 Routing Table Overview The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when the FINS communications are used It consists of two tables A local network table and a relay network table Local Network Table The local network table is a table desc
280. pulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the open process ing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Opening Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation 80 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 1 Receiving Flag Bit 1 Turns ON when a receive request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the receive pro cessing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Receiving Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation Sending Flag Bit 2 Turns ON when a send request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the send process ing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Sending Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Storage Area designation Closing Flag Bit 3 Turns ON when a close request is received either by control bit manipulation or the CMND 490 instruction and turns OFF again when the close process ing has been completed When CMND 490 is used the Results Storage Error Flag bit 14 will turn ON at the same time as the Closing Flag turns OFF if there is an error in the Results Stor
281. quivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned ap
282. r network Go to Network Connection Problems E N D 210 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 3 UDP Socket Problems General Problems General Problems Go through the procedure in 8 4 2 FINS Communications Problems SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 before starting this procedure Is the response code a value other than 0000 Go to 8 5 Troubleshooting with Response Codes Go to 8 6 Results Storage Area Response Codes Is the response There will be no response code in the results storage code in the results storage area if Socket Service Request Switches are being area a value other than used 0000 Go to Network Connection Problems Opening and Closing Refer to General Problems above Problems 211 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Reception Problems Reception Problems occurred Is reception processing finishing Is the remote node not processing to send data Adjust the remote node to process send data Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS There may be noise affecting the network Increase the number of retries or take Y p measures against noise as described in 2 4 Network Installation Have any reception errors occurred Read memory status using the FINS command READ MEMORY STATUS There may be too much load on the Ethernet Y Unit If the memory exhaustion
283. r with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs xiv CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CS1D CPU CS1D CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1M CPU Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs and Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 Manual number Model WS02 CXPC1 EV6 Name CX Programmer Ver 6 1 Operation Manual Contents Provides information on how to use the CX Programmer a Windows based programming device and CX Net a Windows based network configuration tool Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform pro gramming CXONE AL CX One Setup Man ual Describes operating procedures for the CX One FA Inte grated Tool Package Refer to this manual for operating procedures for the CX One FA Integrated Tool Package CXONE AL CX Integrator Opera tion Ma
284. ra CTP LAN5 UTP unshielded twisted 0 5mm x 4P__ pair cable Category 3 4 5 5e Connectors STP Plug Modular Panduit MPS588 plug Corp UTP Plug Panduit MP588 C Corp 2 4 3 Precautions Precautions on Laying Twisted pair Cable Basic Precautions and the Ethernet Unit e After laying the twisted pair cable check the connection with a 10Base T cable tester Environment Precautions e Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub e The UTP cable is not shielded and the hub is designed for use in OA environments In environments subject to noise construct a system with shielded twisted pair STP cable and hubs suitable for an FA environ ment e Do not lay the twisted pair cable together with high voltage lines 35 Network Installation Section 2 4 Do not lay the twisted pair cable near devices that generate noise e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants Hub Installation i e Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise Environment Precautions e Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants Hub Connection Met
285. re it is important to inspect the Unit regularly Inspection Interval Normally inspect once or twice per year Choose the inspection period according to the severity of the operat ing conditions New installation should be inspected more frequently until they are judged to be stable Inspection Items Correct any of the items in the table below not conforming to the specified standard Details Standard Environment Temperature around Unit 0 to 55 C Humidity around Unit 10 to 90 with no condensation Accumulated dust No accumulated dust Ethernet Unit firmly attached No looseness Transceiver cable connector fully pushed in No looseness Condition of transceiver cable No visible abnormality Twisted pair cable connector fully pushed in No looseness Condition of twisted pair cable No visible abnormality Tools Required for Inspection The following tools are needed to inspect the Ethernet Unit Standard Tools e Flat blade and Phillips screwdrivers e Tester or digital voltmeter e Industrial alcohol and a clean cloth Tools Required Under Special Circumstances e Synchroscope e Pen oscilloscope e Thermometer and hygrometer 241 Appendix G Ethernet Unit Web Function Web Function Ethernet Units with Unit Ver 1 3 or later can use a Web browser from a personal computer or other device to easily make the Ethernet Unit s system settings and monitor statuses Web Function List The infor
286. records show counts UDP data may be corrupted Check your applications Is the network memory being used more than 80 Read protocol status using the FINS command READ PROTOCOL STATUS The UDP protocol of the remote node may not be compatible with that of the Ethernet Unit Use another communications service Are any of the first three items in the tatus being counted Check the remote node for transmission problems using the next procedure If nothing is uncovered go to Network Return to the procedure Connection Problems for general problems 212 Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 Transmission Problems Transmission Problems occurred Is send processing not finishing Y Return to the procedure for general problems Read protocol status using the FINS command READ PROTOCOL STATUS fail The UDP socket specified by the Tae desi aion destination UDP port number in the been counted in the ICMP send parameters is not opening at status the remote node Read controller status using the FINS command READ CONTROLLER STATUS There may be too much traffic on the network and UDP packets may be Have any send getting corrupted Use TCP sockets or errors occurred adjust the network to reduce excessive traffic Check the reception status on the remote node Return to the procedure for general problems 213 Troubleshooting Procedures Sect
287. red in the I O tables in the CPU Unit the Ethernet Unit will operate using the default IP address 192 168 250 node_number This default IP address can be used initially to connect online For details on connecting the CX Programmer to the PLC by serial cable refer to the CX Programmer operation manual For details on connecting the CX Programmer to the PLC by Ethernet re fer to 6 5 Using FINS Applications Use the mouse to select O table in the Project Window Either double click or right click to display the Properties Menu and select Open The I O Table Window will then be displayed Ti PLC 10 Table NewPLC1 Biel Ea File Options Help F CS1G CJ1G CPU45 0000 Main Rack amp 0000 Rack 01 e 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 7 amp b k H a H 0000 Rack 04 0000 Rack 05 0000 Rack 06 0000 Rack 07 CS1G CJ1G CPU45 Program Z 41 Unit Setup Procedure Section 2 7 3 Read the I O tables from the PLC and select the Rack to which the Ether net Unit is mounted Ti PLC I0 Table NewPLC1 Jol x Eile Options Help T CS1G CJ1G CPU45 0000 Main Rack 00 1500 Ethernet Unit ET 0 01 0000 Empty Slot 02 0000 Empty Slot 03 0000 Empty Slot 04 0000 Empty Slot 05 0000 Empty Slot DE 0000 Empty Slot 07 0000 Empty Slot 08 0000 Empty Slot 09 0000 Empty Slot 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 0000 Rack 04 0000 Rack 05
288. responses 159 retries 136 socket numbers 157 specifications 115 135 TCP IP 3 9 testing 181 troubleshooting 210 UDP IP 2 9 FINS node addresses automatic allocation 9 FINS TCP 3 115 118 communications 120 connection numbers 119 connection status 120 features 118 frame format 119 procedure 121 TCP port number 119 FINS TCP Mode field 65 FINS TCP Port field 62 FINS TCP Tab 64 FINS UDP 2 50 115 116 frame format 116 procedure 117 UDP port numbers 117 FINS UDP Port field 62 FinsGateway 12 130 FinsSend command 6 73 flags Closing Flag 80 Communications Port Enabled Flags 90 Communications Port Error Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags 91 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag 90 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags 91 Data Received Flag 8 80 Error Flags 162 FTP Status Flag 82 Opening Flag 80 Receiving Flag 80 251 Results Storage Error Flag 80 Sending Flag 80 TCP UDP Open Flag 80 FTP communications 17 FTP indicator 26 FTP server 7 9 20 50 troubleshooting 217 FTP Status Flag 82 H Holding Area 136 HOST indicator 26 Host name field 67 68 74 HTTP Tab 75 hub 11 35 connections cascade 36 stack 36 installation 37 precautions 36 T O allocations 136 CIO Area 78 DM Area 86 I O tables creating 39 ICM
289. ribing the correspondences among unit numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node Example Unit 04 Unit 05 Unit 06 Unit 07 Local Network Table Local network Unit number address 1 04 2 05 3 06 Network 1 3 oY Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Note 1 The unit number is set 0 to F 1 to 15 by the rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit 2 The network address is the number of the network 1 to 127 to which the Communications Unit or Board is connected It is set when the local net work table is created Relay Network Table A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first in order to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node It shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination net work and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the path to reach there When internetwork communications are carried out the end network can be reached by following the relay points 122 Creating Routing Tables Section 6 4 The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC 1 the local node network address 1 node address 1 to PLC 4 the destination node network address 3 node address 2 Te Node 2 3 Unit 0 a relay node k PLC 4 destination node PLC 1 local node PLC 2 relay node 3 Node 1 Node 1 Node
290. rks 7 3 17 TCP CLOSE REQUEST Requests processing to close a TCP socket Other processing being carried out is forcibly ended and a code is recorded in the results storage area Command Block Command Results storage area code TCP socket number Socket option Command Response code code ted Response code Response Block Results Storage Format Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 TCP Socket Number The TCP socket number to be closed specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command 180 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Results Storage Area Command Precautions Response Codes Results Storage Area Response Codes The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified Any other processing such as sending or receiving data being carried out when this close command is executed will be forcibly ended and a code will be stored in the results storage area to indicate that this processing was forcibly ended Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too
291. rocedures or operations given XV xvi Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NO
292. rocessing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode Processing time considerations settings Normal Mode CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max of peripheral ser chronous memory access vicing time for each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral Parallel processing with port RS 232C port or Inner Board asynchronous memory access For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual 150 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 6 6 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 1 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU processing mode settings at the CPU Unit CPU processing mode settings Processing time considerations Normal Mode Priority peripheral servicing Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asynchronous memory access 1 ms max For details refer to the CPU Unit operation manual Transmission processing time command 0 550 ms Number of words sent x 0 002 0 550 ms Command Response Transmission Delay Command The transmission delay time will be as follows depending on the baud rate set for the Ethernet Unit There may be additional delays depending on devices such as hubs
293. roducts and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETN01 ETN11 and CJ1W ETN11 The CX Programmer can be connected and used with FINS UDP even if personal computer middleware FinsGateway is not used FinsGateway any version can also be used together with the CX Programmer Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Connecting through Multiple Segments Using Media with Unreliable Connections Such as a Wireless LAN Connecting from a Personal Computer with a Dynamic Private IP Address Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP FINS TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use lower versions of the CX Pro grammer with FINS TCP use FinsGateway version 2003 or higher as per sonal computer middleware Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP FINS TCP is a new function supported by these Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss resulting from unreliable connections For CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online To use l
294. ror occurred The specified socket was closed while receiving data 7 3 11 UDP SEND REQUEST Requests that data be received by a UDP socket 169 Command Response Reference Command Block ehh LoL LL Len cc l a aaa Command code Socket option Response Block Results Storage Format UDP socket number Parameters Socket Option Command UDP Socket Number Command Results Storage Area Command Destination IP Address Command Destination UDP Port Number Command Number of Bytes Sent Command Results Storage Area Send Data Command Response Codes 170 Section 7 3 Results storage area Destination IP address Destination Number of Send data UDP bytes sent port number Command Response code code Em Response Number of code bytes sent The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 The UDP socket number to send the data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 The area in which the result of the command execution is stored The first byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be specified The IP address of the node to which data is being sent is specified in hexa decimal The UDP port number of the node to which data is be
295. rt 7 is ON and SEND 090 is not being executed the trans mission execution program will start when execution condition CIO 000001 turns ON Input CIO 120002 remains ON from the start of RECV 098 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word Contents Meaning D0005 00 10 Number of reception words 16 D0006 00 03 Source network number 3 D0007 20 00 Source node number 32 Source unit address 0 D0008 07 05 Response required Communications port No used 7 1 Number of retries 5 D0009 Response monitor time Default A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100 at network number 3 node number 32 unit address 0 the FLS is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the ocal node Reset Input Creation Reception Error Display Reception Data Processing If there is no reception processing completion error the 16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 on wards is stored at D00040 onwards With CS CJ series PLCs the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits 0 to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR 260 instruction is be ing executed using the ports corresponding to those flags 2 Before using the sample program as is confirm that the memory areas words and bits used in the sample program are not already being used in the user program o r by Special I O Units 146 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 6 6 6 Transmission Delays
296. rt number EADDRINUSE 7 3 10 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST Requests that data be sent from a UDP socket Command Block Command Results storage area Number Timeout code of reception value UDP socket number bytes Socket option Command Response code code Response Block Results Storage Format e a n a a Response Source IP address Source UDP Number of Received data code port number reception bytes Parameters Socket Option Command The socket option specified as 1 byte The setting is not valid for this com mand Set to 0 UDP Socket Number The UDP socket number to receive data specified as 1 byte between 1 and 8 Command Results Storage Area The area in which the results of the command execution are stored The first Command byte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified 168 Command Response Reference Number of Reception Bytes Command Results Storage Area Timeout Value Command Source IP Address Results Storage Area Source UDP Port Number Results Storage Area Received Data Results Storage Area Precautions Response Codes Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 7 3 The maximum number of bytes of data to be received is given in the com mand The number of bytes of data re
297. rtisement to be received if the transmission window is smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set If no window ad vertisement is received within the time limit the number of segments per mitted by the transmission window are sent If the transmission window is set to 0 a window probe 1 octet of data is sent before the timer restarts The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set on the hold timer The number of times the hold packet is resent Always 0 The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the connection is cut off 2 Send Information 40 Bytes Ten information items are returned in the following sequence O ONTO OV e GIN 10 The total number of packets sent The number of data packets sent The number of data bytes sent The number of data packets resent The number of data bytes resent The number of ACK packets sent The number of window probes 1 octet of data sent The number of emergency data packets sent Always 0 The number of window advertisement packets sent The number of control packets SYN FIN RST sent 3 Receive Information Twenty one information items are returned in the following sequence g e oO N gt 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The total number of packets received The number of packets received continuously The number of bytes received continuously The number of received packets discarded du
298. s Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small TCP socket number or number of reception bytes is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area The specified socket is receiving data No connection could be established to the specified socket High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS 0042 see note Received ICMP data EMSGSIZE 0044 see note Received ICMP data ENOPROTOOPT 0045 see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED 004B A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note Incorrect destination IP address ENETUNREACH No network number in IP router table Router incorrectly set 004F see note Received ICMP data EHOSTDOWN 0051 see note Received ICMP data EHOSTUNREACH Router incorrectly set 0053 A communications error occurred with the remote node ETIMEDOUT 0066 Internal memory cannot be allocated cannot execute service 0080 A receive request timeout error occurred 0081 Socket was closed while receiving
299. s Model number Previous models CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 New models CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Physical layer 10Base T 100Base TX 10Base T Number of nodes 126 254 PLC maintenance via the Internet Not possible to send FINS commands from a personal computer to the PLC via the Internet Can send commands including FINS com mands by e mail over the Internet from a personal computer to the PLC using the mail receive function Server specification Specification by IP address only Specification by IP address or by host name using the DNS client function FINS com munica tions service Automatic IP address acquisi tion DHCP cli ent by personal computer Communi cations ser vice Not possible for a computer automatically acquiring IP addresses to send commands to the PLC and receive responses A computer automatically acquiring IP addresses can send commands to the PLC and receive responses UDP IP By automatic generation dynamic IP address conversion method TCP IP Automatic FINS communi cations with per sonal computers without fixed node addresses Not possible Possible with Automatic allocation by Ethernet Unit Client FINS automatic node address allo cation function TCP IP only Handling TCP IP With FINS communications only UDP IP possible With FINS communications both UDP IP and TCP IP possible Simultaneous con
300. s Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit 99 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Connection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address Local IP address network number FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connection method FINS UDP With the combined method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not dynamically changed For all others nodes the data from FINS nodes registered with a remote IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be dynamically changed when the Unit is turned ON or restarted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table ahi IP address Node number in 18 153 214 062 IP address table a IP address 20 153 214 0 129 IP address method 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent Node number not in IP address table Network number xx xx 00 00 Bg IP address Automatic FINS node number xx See note generation FINS command method sent Automati
301. s destinatior mail address exist Did required mail content fail to be obtained D Is the ERH indicator The mail transmission function cannot be used because no IP address or host name is set for the SMTP server Using the CX Programmer make the SMTP settings in the System Setup If the host name is used for the server settings then the DNS tab settings must be made too There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 255 255 255 255 or127 e The SMTP server host name is wrong The local mail address is wrong The destination mail address is wrong Referring to the error log correct the communications path e The SMTP server address is wrong e The IP router table is wrong e There is a communications error or a mistake in the communications path settings e If POP before SMTP is required for the SMTP server connection SMTP POP before SMTP and POP must be set in the Unit Setup There is a mistake in the Unit Setup Correct the mistake e The SMTP server address is wrong set to 0 0 0 0 e The mail transmission settings in the Unit Setup are wrong not set There is a mistake in the send conditions in the Unit Setup s mail transmission settings Correct the mistake e The Mail Send Switch never turns ON after a start power ON or restart e The interval timer is not set or is set to an interval longer than intended e The sen
302. s not between 1 and 126 The IP address is 0 IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation 7 3 22 IP ADDRESS WRITE Command Block Response Block Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Command IP address Subnet mask code Command Response code code 185 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Parameters IP Address Command Subnet Mask Command Response Codes Precautions Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FFFFFFFF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal If 0 0 0 0 is specified the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled Example 150 31 2 83 Specify the local IP address of the Ethernet Unit using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FFFFFFFF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Example 255 255 255 255 FF FF FF 00 Response code Description Normal Command too large Command too small The local IP address and subnet mask set using this mask are written to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the Ethernet Unit The new local IP address and subnet mask settings will not be effective until the PC is restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset 7 3 23 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Number of Records Command Response 186 Reads the IP address
303. s table records table records Command Response Response Block code code Parameters Number of Records The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and Command 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the IP address table will be cleared so that no records are registered 184 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 IP Address Table Records Command Precautions Response Codes Specify the IP address table records The number of records specified must be provided The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is cal culated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 1 6 bytes FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command hexadecimal IP Address IP address used by TCP IP protocol hexadecimal The new I O address table records will not be effective until the PC is restarted or the Ethernet Unit is reset An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set for automatic generation Response code Description Normal echo reply received from the remote node Command too large Command too small The number of records specified does not match the sent data length The number of records is not between 0 and 32 The FINS node address i
304. s to which they can be mounted depends on the Backplane Up to four Ethernet Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0 9 N m and the Unit s screws to a torque of 0 4 N m CS1W BC023 BC033 BC053 BC083 BC103 CPU Backplane CS series CPU Rack Can mount to any position g with 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots CPU S Pi 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Backplane not possible with 2 slot CPU Backplane Up to four Units can be mounted CS1W BI033 Bl053 Bl083 Bl103 CS series Expansion Backplane to tne slots shown in the diagrams CS series Expansion Rack Can mount to any position with 3 5 8 or 10 slots n a y 3 5 8 or 10 slots C200H Expansion I O Backplane C200H Expansion Rack Ethernet Unit cannot be mounted to any slots Note CPU CPU Unit PS Power Supply Unit The CS1W ETN21 Ethernet Units maximum current consumption is 380 mA Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 2 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC Ethernet Units can be connected to either a CJ series CPU Rack or a CJ series
305. small The TCP socket number is out of range The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area No connection could be established to the specified socket High traffic at Unit cannot execute service 7 3 18 PING Command Block Response Block Parameters Destination IP Address Command Timeout Value Command Response code Description 0000 Normal Equivalent processing to the UNIX computer PING command see below m ey 7 Command Destination IP address Timeout code value SY Command Response code code The IP address in hexadecimal of the destination node for the PING com mand echo request packet The wait time for the echo reply packet The value is set in seconds The time out time is set at 20 seconds if the value is specified as 0 If the echo reply packet is not received within the set time limit the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code 181 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Remarks Response Codes PING Command The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol When the PING command is executed an echo request packet is sent to the remote node ICMP Correct communications are confirmed when the returned response packet is received normally The echo reply packet is automatically returned by the remote node ICMP Respo
306. space A maximum of eight settings can be registered The default is for nothing to be set Settings In this example setting for Node A refer to the diagram above a network with a Network ID of 130 26 XX is connected to an IP router with an IP address of 130 25 36 253 Insert Routers IP Address x IP Network Address 130 26 0 0 Routers IP Address 130 25 36 254 Cancel Only one default IP router can be set 49 Unit Setup for Particular Applications Section 2 10 The default IP router is selected when no Network ID exists in the IP router table for the destination network number To set the default IP router set 0 0 0 0 for the IP address and set the default IP router s IP address for the router address 2 10 Unit Setup for Particular Applications FINS UDP FINS TCP Socket Services 2 Aside from the basic settings the required settings vary depending on the particular communications applications that are used For details on settings refer to SECTION 3 CX Programmer Unit Setup CX Programmer tab Settings Conversion FINS UDP Port No IP Address Table Destination IP Address Change Dynamically For details refer to SECTION 6 FINS Communications Service in the Opera tion Manual Construction of Networks Use CX Integrator to make routing table settings as required OxProgrammertab ___ Settings Setup FINS TCP Port No FINS TCP FINS TCP Connection
307. specification method Broadcast Address Setting 0 Broadcast with host number set to all ones 4 3BSD specifications 1 Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes 4 2BSD specifications IP Address Conversion Method Setting 00 01 Automatic generation method 10 IP address table reference method 11 Combined method IP address table reference automatic generation FINS UDP Port Number Setting 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value 160 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Ethernet Address Response Response Codes FFINS TCP Port Number Setting 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value Baud Rate setting 0 Automatic detection 1 10Base T SNTP Server Specification Method 0 IP address 1 Host name SMTP Server Specification Method 0 IP address 1 Host name POP Server Specification Method 0 IP address 1 Host name System Setup Format Bit address Format classification ETN11 mode ETN21 mode Reserved The Ethernet address of the Ethernet Unit is returned The Ethernet address is the address marked on the label on the side of the Ethernet Unit 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 7 3 3 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Command Block Response Block Reads the controller status 06 01 Command code 06 01 eal 2 byte 4 byte 4 byte 4 byte 4 byte 4 byte yy yy ey ty ee Command Response Error flags Totalnumber Total number Total number Total
308. t Either the remote node is not executing an active TCP open or there is a block on the net work Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code UNIX error message Description Closed by close command during socket servicing Section 8 6 Probable remedy No action is necessarily called for Connection with remote node not achieved for passive TCP open request The remote IP address and TCP port number settings differ from those of the remote socket active side 229 Results Storage Area Response Codes Section 8 6 230 Parameter TCP send buffer Appendix A Ethernet Network Parameters 4 096 bytes Description Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer TCP receive buffer 4 096 bytes Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer UDP send buffer 9 000 bytes Maximum capacity of the UDP send buffer UDP receive buffer 9 016 bytes Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer FINS receive buffer 16 383 bytes Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer RAW send buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer RAW receive buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer Hold timer 75 s 12 min max The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within 75s Resend timer Initial value 1s Maximum value 64s Th
309. t default use local mail address Mail password Change Server access interval time jo H min 0 default 5 ICS1G CJ1G CPU45 Program POP Server Setup Contents Default Server specifi Select whether the POP3 server used for receiving IP Address cation type mail is to be specified by IP address or the host s domain name i e host name IP Address Set the IP address for the POP3 server used for 0 0 0 0 receiving mail This setting is enabled only when IP address is selected as the method for specifying the server Host name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the POP3 server that is to be used for receiving mail This setting is enabled only when host name is selected as the method for specifying the server Port No Set the port to be used for connecting to the POP3 0 server that is to be used for receiving mail Number 110 This setting does not normally need to be changed S used Account Name Set the account name to be used for sending and None receiving mail Only alphanumeric characters can be used If no account name is set the portion of the local e mail address to the left of the will be used Mail password Set a password for the account that is to be used None for sending and receiving mail Server access Set the interval for sending and receiving mail Mail 0 interval time will be automatically sent and received at the inter 5 minut
310. t could be sent was limited to user created ASCII text data and system data Now the following e mail functions have been added Commands for the PLC mail remote commands can be written into e mail and the Ethernet Unit can receive them execute them and send responses by e mail This function can be linked to the CS CJ File Memory function e The Ethernet Unit can automatically generate data files 6 000 words maximum per file from the CPU Unit s O memory status and send them to specified e mail addresses as e mail attachments It can also send pro gram files from the Memory Card up to 1 MB to specified e mail addresses as e mail attachments Features Section 1 2 e In addition to using the existing Mail Send Switch or having e mail sent at regular intervals it is possible to set triggers for sending e mail for exam ple by having e mail sent when a PV in the CPU Unit s I O memory reaches a certain value size comparison or when the bit at a specified address turns ON e Up to eight of these e mail send conditions destination trigger type etc can be preregistered so that e mail will be sent automatically whenever the conditions are met Note The e mail functions require a separate mail server SMTP POP3 Automatic PLC Internal Clock Adjustment The built in clock of the PLC connected to the Ethernet can be automatically adjusted with the SNTP server clock taken as the standard Automatic adjust ments through the
311. t name IP Address Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be 0 0 0 0 used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by IP address has been selected Host name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by host name has been selected Port No Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjust ment This setting does not normally need to be changed 74 HTTP Section 3 10 Item Contents Default Retry timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec tion to the SNTP server fails This setting does not normally need to be changed Adjust Time This sets in the CPU Unit s clock data the time differ ence made up from the SNTP server s clock data To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it is input 0 For details refer to SECTION 5 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications 3 10 HTTP Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit i 21 x Eile Options Help Setup FINS TCP DNS SMTP POP Mail Address Send Mail Receive Mail Auto Adjust Time HTTP HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Server Setup Password Port No 0 0 default 809 CSIG CJIG CPU45 Program H
312. t only the same Ethernet network but on various other networks including SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link With the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 the following functions have been upgraded e The FINS communications service can be executed not only with UDP IP but also with TCP IP and it is even possible to use FINS communications with both UDP IP and TCP IP together on the same network Using TCP IP makes FINS communications highly reliable e Even if the IP address and UDP port number of the host computer a DHCP client computer are changed it is still possible for the host com puter to send FINS commands to PLCs on the Ethernet network and to receive responses When UDP is used either the automatic generation dynamic method or the IP address table method must be selected for IP address conversion When TCP is used changes in IP address and TCP port numbers are handled automatically e Multiple FINS applications CX Programmer and user created application programs at the same computer can be connected online to a PLC via Ethernet using either TCP IP or UDP IP 1 5 2 Socket Services Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits 18 The socket services allow devices on the Ethernet to send and receive vari ous data using either the UDP or TCP protocol One way to use socket services is to set the required parameters in the parameter area allocated in the DM Area and then to request particular UDP or TCP socket services by turning
313. t specification i e the IP address or the host name A timeout was generated in communications with the SMTP server e The time for verification from the POP server elapsed when POP before SMTP was set POP Server Error e There is an error in the setting for the POP server host specification i e the IP address or the host name e An error occurred in the POP server verification i e a user name or password setting error A timeout was generated in communications with the POP server 162 Command Response Reference Total Number of Packets Received Response Total Number of Receive Errors Response Total Number of Packets Sent Response Total Number of Errors Sent Response Total Number of Send Collisions Response Precautions Response Codes 7 3 4 Command Block Response Block Section 7 3 Address Disagreement The address conversion method was set for automatic generation but the node address and the last byte of the local IP address do not agree or other host sections are 0 EEPROM Error An error occurred in the EEPROM memory in the Ethernet Unit The total number of packets received by the Ethernet Unit is returned The total number of errors detected while the Ethernet Unit was receiving is returned The types of error detected are short packet errors alignment errors CRC errors frame length errors received frame 1 515 bytes or more and communications c
314. t the Ethernet baud rate for the Ethernet Unit Auto Select either automatic detection or 10Base T For 100Base TX select automatic detection TCP IP keep alive Set the liveness checking interval When socket services using either 0 FINS TCP or TCP IP are used the connection will be terminated if there is no response from the remote node either a server or client within the time set here Enabled for socket services using FINS TCP or TCP IP only Setting range 0 to 65 535 minutes This setting applies to the keep alive setting for each connection set with the FINS TCP tab 120 minutes IP Address Table Set the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS None node addresses and IP addresses With FINS UDP this is enabled only when the IP address table method is set as the IP address conversion method IP Router Table Set when the Ethernet Unit is to communicate through the IP router with None nodes on another IP network segment FTP Login Sets the login name for connecting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP None Password Sets the password for connecting to the Ethernet Unit by FTP None CONFIDENTIAL Port No Set the FTP port number for the Ethernet Unit 0 Note There is normally no need to change this number Two ports are used for FTP a control port and a data transfer port This setting sets only the control port and then the data transfer port uses the number that is one less than
315. table after 3 minutes Window size initial value of maxi mum window size 4 096 bytes The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver gence of TCP sockets Actually the node negotiates with the remote node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes The window size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of the remote node when processing communications Fragment size 1 500 bytes Data packets are fragmented into 1 500 byte IP packets UDP data is separated into 1 472 byte fragments before sending Segment size 1 024 bytes TCP data is separated into 1 024 byte units unless the segments are dif ferent in which case it will be separated into 536 byte units TTL Time to Live 30 Decremented each time an IP router is passed 231 CPU Unit Appendix B Buffer Configuration UDP socket reception See note 1 request buffers 8 x 9 016 max TCP socket reception request buffers 8 x 4 096 max See note 1 ac IP packet input queue 50 max x 1 500 bytes FTP service reception buffer 4 096 bytes FINS reception buffer 16 383 FINS processing bytes max buffers 192 x Communications 2 020 bytes controller Network FINS send buffer 9 000 bytes max FTP service send buffer 4 096 bytes
316. table are dynami cally changed 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Product Model Series Supports automatic Version generation method dynamic CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21_ Yes Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 No Set by automatic 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 generation method or combined method Com munications are not pos sible with personal computers with variable IP addresses CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 No Set by automatic CV CVMt series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 generation method or Ethernet Unit combined method Com munications are not pos FinsGateway Version 4 xx Or sible with personal lower computers with variable IP addresses Version 2003 or Yes higher Programmable Terminal NS Series No Set manually so that Open Network Controller ONC in ee generation method 105 Section 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Static Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 Supports automatic generation method static Yes 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 Yes Simply called auto matic generation method CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11
317. ters Section 7 2 Specifies the parameters for the command code Parameters depend on the command being executed for details refer to the following pages 7 2 2 PLC Memory Areas Memory area Bit Areas EM Area Current value of word Data type The memory areas of the PLC that can be specified for results storage when executing commands from the PC are listed in the table below The Variable type is set in the first byte of the results storage area The remaining three bytes contain the address for communications Addresses in the Addresses for communications column are not the same as the actual memory addresses Word addresses Variable type Addresses for communications Bytes CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 000000 to 17FF00 HO000 to H511 000000 to 01FF00 A448 to A959 01C000 to 03BF00 D00000 to D32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 0 E0_E00000 to EO_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 1 E1_E00000 to E1_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 2 E2_E00000 to E2_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 3 E3_E00000 to E3_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 4 E4_ E00000 to E4_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 5 E5_E00000 to E5_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 6 E6_E00000 to E6_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 7 E7_E00000 to E7_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 8 E8 E00000 to E8_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO Bank 9 E9 E00000 to E9_E32767 000000 to 7FFFOO B
318. time information cannot be read from the CPU Unit the time stamp in the error log will be all zeros This can occur due to CPU Unit startup error unit number errors CPU error and model number errors If the time is read out from a Programming Device the time will be shown as all ze ros in the year 2000 3 The battery must be installed in the CS CJ series CPU Unit the power turned ON and then the time set before the clock in the CPU Unit can be used The time will not be set correctly in the error log unless the clock time is set correctly 4 An error record is not created in EEPROM when a CPU Bus Unit memory error occurs Troubleshooting Procedures Section 8 4 8 4 Troubleshooting Procedures The following procedures can be used to troubleshoot various problems in system operation 8 4 1 Startup Problems Set the node address to Is the node address set between 01 and FE Hex RUN indicator lit ERC indicator lit between 01 and FE Hex N Y Replace the Ethernet Unit Make sure that sufficient power is supplied to the CPU Unit Power supplied to CPU Unit Make sure that Unit is firmly Y pj mounted and tighten the Ethernet Unit loose on Rack mounting screws firmly or lock the sliders into place Pe a Do the RUN and ERH indicators not light if another CPU Unit is mounted to the Rack N Replace the Ethernet Unit N Create the I O tables in th
319. ting Ethernet Units 33 radioactivity xxiii RD indicator 26 Receive file with specified extension only field 73 Receive Mail Tab 51 72 Receive Request Switch 85 Receiving Flag 80 RECV 098 instruction 17 138 relay tables 122 RESET 159 response codes 223 FINS commands 156 UNIX error messages 227 Results Storage Area 157 response codes 227 Results Storage Error Flag 80 Retry timer field 66 Routing Table Area 12 routing tables creating 122 local network table 122 relay network table 122 setting examples 124 RUN indicator 26 troubleshooting 200 S safety precautions xxii SD indicator 26 Send Error Log information field 71 Send file data I O memory data field 71 Send Mail Tab 51 70 Send mail upon trigger field 70 Send Request Switch 85 Send status information field 71 Send user data field 71 SEND 090 instruction 17 137 transmission delay 147 Sending Flag 80 Index Server access interval time field 68 Server specification type field 67 68 74 servers specifying 22 service status 82 Setup Tab 50 62 shock resistance CJ series 14 CS series 13 short circuits precautions xxiv signals precautions Xxiv SMTP communications 17 SMTP server 5 22 SMTP Tab 51 67 SNTP communications 17 SNTP server 10 22 socket option 157 Socket Service Request Switches 84 socket services 18 50 creating communications applications 7 FINS communications 15
320. tion requests received Received only when port number matches Received only when IP address matches Received only when IP address and port number matches 173 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes 0000 Normal 0105 Local IP address setting error 0302 CPU Unit error execution not possible 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small 1100 TCP socket number is out of range Local TCP port number is 0 1101 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range 1103 Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area 220F The specified socket connection is already open or is cur rently being opened 2211 High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal 003E Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high reception load ENOBUFS 0042 see note An error occurred EMSGSIZE 0045 A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNABORTED 0049 Duplicated port numbers EADDRINUSE 004A see note An error occurred ECONNREFUSED 004B see note A communication error occurred with the remote node ECONNRESET 004E see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address ENE TUNREACH 0051 see note A parameter error occurred at the remote IP address EHOS TUNREACH 0053 A communication error occurred with the remote node ETIME
321. tions related to these settings are explained in detail in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications SECTION 7 Using FINS Communi cations to Create Host Applications The default settings should normally be used Local Device Is a Client 1 2 Set the client Set the IP addresses for the connection destination Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit i e the server connected by FINS TCP This setting must be made if this Ethernet Unit is to be used as a FINS TCP client 103 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 5 2 3 Application Examples Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method 104 Note With FINS UDP whether using the automatic conversion method dynamic the IP address table method or the combined method remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses in the internal table are changed after FINS messages are received Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command origi nated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent IP address FINS command Ethernet Ethernet Unit with fixed
322. tus ON while a link is established between hubs OFF when the link between hubs is terminated 82 Not used FTP Status Bit 0 Turns ON while connected to an FTP client and OFF while not connected With the FTP server function only one FTP client can be connected at a time so while this bit is ON no other clients can connect to the server The FTP status is also shown by the Ethernet Units FTP indicator as follows Not lit FTP server on standby FTP status OFF Lit FTP server operating FTP status ON Accessing Memory Sending Mail Bit 1 This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to create a file to be attached using the mail send function and it turns OFF when the file has been created ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail receive function ClO Area Allocations Sec tion 4 1 Accessing Memory Receiving Mail Bit 2 This bit turns ON while CPU Unit memory is being accessed to store an attached file using the mail receive function and it turns OFF after the file has been stored System Setup Format Bits 8 to 11 These bits show the format classification in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area Bit address Format classification 10 ETN11 mode ETN21 mode Reserve Error Status Ethernet Unit The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Unit is reflected as shown in the to CPU Unit fo
323. twice the maximum segment life 2MSL All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 7 3 28 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses 27 65 e _ 72 Command code m a n A S Command Response Number Address of addresses information code code Number of Addresses Response The number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses being returned The Ethernet Unit is always 0001 1 decimal Address Information Pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses Each pair requires 6 bytes and has the following configuration Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response Codes 1 6 T FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal IP Address IP address set on the Ethernet Unit hexadecimal 0000 Normal 1001 Command too large 7 3 29 IP ADDRESS READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup and the FINS node address The values read with this command how ever are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation The settings that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER DATA READ page 160 and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ page 196 This command is supported for
324. uction can be calculated using the equation illustrated in the following diagram RECV 098 executed in user program CPU Bus Unit CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node i 5 i Service Cycle local node 2 i i CPU Bus Unit i CPU Bus Unit service processing time service processing time local node H local node 2 Transmission Reception CPU data set ing ti f ing ti iy processing time processing time command processing time response y g Transmission Delays Transmission Delays command response Reception processing Transmission CPU Bus Unit time command f processing time response f service processing time remote node yi fi 1 L 1 i fi 1 fi 1 i 1 CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle remote node Maximum transmission delay Maximum transmis CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node 1 sion delay time CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 1 Transmission processing time command Transmission delay command Reception processing time command CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Transmission processing time response Transmission Delays response Reception processing time response CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle local node 2 CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 1 The processing time will be as follows depending on the CPU p
325. ults are used for the IP address and the Unit settings the set tings will be as shown below Item Operation status IP address 192 168 250 FINS node address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Class C mask Broadcast settings 4 3BSD Baud rate Auto TCP IP keep alive 120 min IP router table None IP router not enabled Setting the IP Address in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area This method sets the IP address in the IP Address Display Setting Area in the CPU Bus Unit Words Allocated in the DM Area when the IP address is not set in the Unit Setup When the IP address is set in the Unit Setup the IP Address Display Setting Area becomes the area for displaying the settings To make settings in the IP Address Display Setting Area use the CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to write the values In order for the new settings to go into effect either the Ethernet Unit must be restarted or the power must be turned ON again to the PLC 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 98 1 2 3 4 m 99 5 6 7 8 IP address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 hexadecimal If only the IP address is set according to the IP Address Display Setting Area and the defaults are used for all other Unit settings the settings will be as shown below IP address Words allocated for CPU Bus Unit m 98 to m 99 Subnet mask Uses value corresponding to IP address class Broadcast settings 4 3BSD spec
326. up Not doing so may result in malfunc tion or damage e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PLC including the setting of the startup operation mode e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory 6 Conformance to EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive 6 2 Concepts EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Note Applicable EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility and EMI Electromagnetic Interference Standards in the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility stan dards ar
327. us Manipulated by Unit operation DNS server error ON when the following errors occur during DNS server operation An illegal server IP address is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when DNS server operation is normal Routing table error ON if the routing table information is incorrect OFF when the routing table is normal Not used SNTP server error ON when the following errors occur during SNTP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when SNTP server operation is normal SMTP server error ON when the following errors occur during SMTP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set e A timeout occurs during communications with the server e The verification time from the server has expired when POP before SMTP is set OFF when SMTP server operation is normal POP server error ON when the following errors occur during POP server operation An illegal server IP address or host name is set A server verification error user name or password occurs e A timeout occurs during communications with the server OFF when use of the POP server is normal Address disagreement ON if the remote IP address is set to automatic genera tion but the local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree OFF under all other circumsta
328. ust be a separate SMTP server on the network When using the SMTP server of an Internet Service Provider ISP security measures such as POP before or SMTP may be required This Unit handles POP before SMTP In addition to the IP address the host name used for the DNS service can be specified for the SMTP POPS server Ethernet Unit Function Guide Section 1 1 Reference Q Mail software gt CE a Receiving Intranet 1 Office floor Server room i a i N 2 DNS server I Q Mail software POPS server i N i p o i I SMTP server SNTP server Ethernet Receiving e mail Ethernet Sending e mail 5 Monitoring PLC changes and sending equipment PLC s I O memory data status to the operator by sent as attached file e mail SECTION 2 Mail Send Function in the Operation Manual Construction of Applications Receiving E mail Data and Files at the PLC Operation Use the mail receive function When the mail receive function is used the PLC can be accessed through a mail address enabling remote applications via the Internet to be constructed relatively easily With the mail receive function any of the following remote commands can be specified as e mail subjects e FileWrite File Write e ChangeMode Operating Mode FileRead File Read Change FileDelete File Delete e ErrorLogRead Error Log Rea
329. ust be allocated Ethernet 2s sseSss S 5 t Automatically allocated Ethernet address Allocating Addresses to Ethernet Units The IP address FINS UDP port number and FINS TCP port number set for the Ethernet Unit are mainly used when receiving FINS communications mes Ethernet Unit FINS Message Reception 96 sages Application level Transport level Internet level Physical level _ Use the Node No rotary switch on the front of the Ethernet Unit to set the FINS node address conforming to Ethernet address FIN S Node number k UDP mrpr TORY TCP port number number P IP address k Ethernet Ethernet address _ Receives communications data IP address UDP port number and FINS node number Ethernet V2 IP UDP __ FINS header FINS data Ethernet address IP address FINS node address A fixed number is assigned to each Ethernet Unit and it cannot be changed Either use the default IP address 192 168 250 FINS_node number or set the address in the word allocated in the DM Area or in the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer FINS UDP port number Either use the default FINS UDP port number 9600 or set the number using the CX Program mer s Unit Setup e FINS TCP port number Either use the default FINS TCP port number 9600 or set the number using the CX Program mer s
330. ween the I O memory area and the file memory 22 0B PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the parameter area and the file memory 22 0c PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the UM User Memory area and the file memory 22 15 CREATE DELETE DIRECTORY Creates or deletes a directory Debugging 23 01 FORCED SET RESET Force sets or force resets bits or releases force set status 23 02 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Cancels all bits that have been force set or force reset 6 6 4 Writing Programs Programs incorporating the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions CS Cu series CPU Units have eight communications ports Only one instruction can be executed at any given port at one time however so the program must not overlap the use of any of the ports A program example is provided below Communications port Ethernet Unit CPU Unit ben H Instruction 1 H H Instruction 2 HI nstruction sH H Instruction 4 HH Instruction 5 piah HIH Instruction 7 O HH Instruction 8 There are eight communications ports so up to eight communications instructions can be executed at a time The number of messages that can be sent or received with a single C
331. ws ressis einga moins SEa ee eee 39 2 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC 39 2 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables 0 4 40 2 7 UmtSetip Procedure reisa ee sanae Enr E weed neu dna ek 41 2 8 Using the Web Browser Setting Function 00 43 229 Basic Setin gS 4c eee Bh Ree A SUA 35 RANA SAK 46 2 10 Unit Setup for Particular Applications 00000 50 2 11 Communications Tests eri 0 0 cece eee eee 52 2 11 1 PING Comm nd peen aiia s eei a a ee eee 52 2 11 2 Ethernet Unite res iai iei eni ea e EE ES SEE eee 52 2 11 3 Host Computer orea tap eee E OE E eee 53 2 12 Converting from Previous Models 0 0 00 e eee eee ee eee 53 29 Overview of Startup Procedure Section 2 1 2 1 Determine the local IP address and address conversion method Set the unit number y Set the node number y Mount the Unit to the PLC y Connect to the network using twisted pair cable y Turn ON power to the CPU Unit y Create the I O tables Overview of Startup Procedure The following procedure is the same for the CS Series and CJ Series Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses Refer to 2 2 Switch Settings Refer to 2 2 Switch Settings Refer to 2 3 Mounting to a PLC Refer to 2 4 Network Installation Refer to 2 6 Creating I O Tables See note 3
332. ynamic for addresses in the internal table Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connection method FINS UDP With the dynamic method data in an internal table that has been generated can be dynamically converted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP Ethernet Unit CPU Unit Personal computer P Remote FINS node number Change Local FINS node number Za Must be fixed registration Automatic generation Local FINS node number dynamic setting T Can be changed Internal table Local IP address y y Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command Ethernet IP address FINS response 4 For the remote IP address a response is returned to the changed IP address Automatic Generation With the static method as well the following values are set for addresses in Static the internal table when the Ethernet Unit is turned ON or restarted Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connection
333. yte specifies the memory area and data type variable type The 2nd to 4th bytes specify the beginning address of the results storage area Refer to page 158 for details about the variable types and addresses that can be spec ified The UDP port number for communications with the socket is specified as 2 bytes 0 cannot be specified Packets received at this port are distributed to the socket specified in the UDP socket number and send packets are distrib uted from the UDP socket to this port The following ports for the Ethernet Unit s communications services cannot be specified UDP port No used for FINS Default 9600 UDP port No used for DNS server access Default 53 UDP port No used for SNTP server access Default 123 Response code Description Normal Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large 167 Command Response Reference Section 7 3 Response code Description Command too small UDP socket number is out of range Local UDP port number is 0 The variable type for the results storage area is out of range Non zero bit address specified for the results storage area Specified socket is already open or is being closed High traffic at Unit cannot execute service Results Storage Area Response Codes Response code Description Normal Internal buffer cannot be reserved due to high receive load ENOBUFS Duplicate UDP po

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Documento PDF - UniCA Eprints - Università degli studi di Cagliari.  in-lite  pdf Documentation language en size 0.74 MB  一一一  Samsung RL34HGMG Uživatelská přiručka  Winegard GM-1518 User's Manual  4EA Termopar 10Bits/Caracteristicas Tecnicas/CT100410  Manual - Atención al Cliente  Bond Manufacturing 67908 Instructions / Assembly  Philips Trimmer CRP298  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file